JP6216645B2 - Game board - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game board used for a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) are continuously stopped for a predetermined period of time, and are stopped, rocked, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a backup power supply is provided so that the contents of the RAM provided in the gaming control microcomputer are stored, and a decrease in power supply voltage is detected. A detection signal from the power supply monitoring means is input to the game control microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer is configured to execute processing for storing information in the RAM (processing when power supply is stopped). is there. In such a case, the next time power supply to the gaming machine is started, the state of the gaming machine is changed to the state before the power supply is stopped based on the information stored in the RAM. Recovery processing to restore the state is executed. The detection signal from the power supply monitoring means is input to the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) terminal of the gaming control microcomputer, and the gaming control microcomputer stops power supply in the non-maskable interrupt processing (NMI processing). There is a case where it is configured to execute a process (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-24606 A

  However, the power supply stop process is not accurately executed, and the recovery process may be executed based on inaccurate information.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to prevent an inaccurate restoration process from being executed when power supply is started.

  (1) The game board according to the present invention performs variable display of identification information based on the fact that a predetermined start condition is satisfied after the game medium passes through the start area, and the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the identification information. A game board capable of playing a game by controlling to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when being derived and displayed, wherein the start area (first start winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14) And a plurality of types of winning areas (first starting winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14, large winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20), and normal winning opening (winning opening (normal winning opening) 29, 30, 33, 39)) and a game control process (for example, step S21) for controlling the progress of the game after executing an initial setting process (for example, the process of steps S10 to S15) when power supply to the game board is started. ~ S33 ) For executing a game control (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) and a power source for outputting a voltage drop signal (eg, a power-off signal) based on a voltage drop of a power source (eg, VSL) having a predetermined potential Monitoring means (for example, power supply monitoring circuit 920) and reset means (for example, a watch for resetting the game control microcomputer when a predetermined monitoring time is measured and it is measured that the monitoring time has elapsed) Dog timer 506b) and signal output means for outputting a signal (winning information signal) that can identify the winning area and the number of winnings that the game medium has won (for example, the information output processing of S29 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) The game control microcomputer is used in the game control process. Based on the storage means (for example, the RAM 55) capable of storing the stored data for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the game board is stopped, and the input of the voltage drop signal, On the condition that a specific value is set in a predetermined area in the storage means, a power supply stop time processing execution means (for example, a game control micro) for executing the power supply stop time processing for storing the storage contents of the storage means A portion of the computer 560 that executes steps S453 to S481) and reset setting means for setting to enable or disable the operation of the reset means (for example, the processing of steps S4 and S482 in the game control microcomputer 560). Part to be executed) and when the power supply is started, it is in a predetermined area (for example, backup flag area) On the condition that a fixed value (for example, 55 (H)) is set, a recovery processing unit (for executing a recovery process for recovering the control state to the state before the power supply is stopped based on the storage contents of the storage unit) For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S7 and S41 to S45, and when a specific value (for example, AA (H)) is not set in a predetermined area, the process when the power supply is stopped Including a prohibiting means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes the process of step S450), and a predetermined value is set in a predetermined area when the power supply stop process is executed (FIG. 53, step 453).

  According to such a configuration, an inaccurate power supply stop process is prevented from being executed when the power supply is stopped, and an inaccurate recovery process is not executed when the power supply is started. Can be.

  (2) In the game board of the above (1), it is preferable that the game control microcomputer sets a specific value in a predetermined area when power supply is started (see steps 43 and S13 in FIG. 51). .

  According to such a configuration, since the specific value is set early, the period during which the power supply stop process cannot be executed can be shortened.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a power supply board. It is a timing diagram which shows typically the state of a reset signal and a power-off signal. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part of a program management area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part of a built-in register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part of a built-in register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part of a built-in register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of the setting data and operation | movement in a header (KHDR). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting content in a program code end address (KPCE), a program code start address 2 (KPCS2), and a program code end address 2 (KPCE2). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting content in reset setting (KRES). It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 16 bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting content in 16 bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting content in 16 bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting content in 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting content in 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting content in security time setting (KSES). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting content in random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example etc. of an internal information register. It is a block diagram which shows the example of 1 structure of an 8-bit random number circuit. It is a block diagram which shows one structural example of a 16-bit random number circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), and an example of a setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of RL interruption control register 0 (RLIC0), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RS interruption control register (RSIC), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RLn maximum value setting register (RLnMX), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example of RSn maximum value setting register (RSnMX), and a setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of a random number sequence change register (RDSC). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of a random number soft latch register (RDSL). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a random number soft latch flag register (RDSF), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RLn soft latch random number value register (RLnSV), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example of RSn soft latch random number value register (RSnSV), and a setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of RS hard latch flag register (RSHF). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RL0 hard latch random number value register m (RL0mHV), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RL1 hard latch random number value register m (RL1mHV), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RL2 hard latch random number value register m (RL2mHV), and an example of setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a RL3 hard latch random number value register m (RL3mHV), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure example of RSn hard latch random number value register (RSnHV), and a setting content. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of a WDT start register (WST), and an example of the setting content. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference in the reset operation by the setting content by reset setting (KRES). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of how to read the data stored in the internal RAM area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a voltage drop. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a voltage drop. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the ratio which determines prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the list of chance eyes for continuous productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the list of prefetch notice effect control patterns. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the ratio which determines the notice effect during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice execution setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the prefetch notice pattern in a modification. It is a flowchart and explanatory drawing which show a part of prefetch notice determination process of a modification, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of prefetch notice effect control pattern of a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus in case a prefetch notice effect is performed in a modification. It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process of the operating / non-operating information from a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the process at the time of insertion which a card unit performs when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship between a CU state and a card insertion state included in a card insertion notification command and a state information request command. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the process of the count history data memorize | stored by P units. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which reads the count log | history memorize | stored in P units to CU. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the historical information (machine history information) from the shipment of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment to disposal. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until shipping information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of shipping information. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until installation information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. 97 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of installation information input to the machine history management center in FIG. 97. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow until removal information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow until discard information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the discard information input into a machine history management center. It is the schematic for demonstrating the history management of the front frame and game board which concern on this embodiment. It is the schematic of the table which memorize | stores the information of a frame, and the information of a game board, in order to perform machine history management of a front frame and a game board. 10 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of a front frame and a game board by a machine history management center. It is a figure explaining the table referred with the flowchart shown in FIG. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main control part, the payout control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a recovery completion confirmation process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between the main control part and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main control part and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power-off and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the game state notification from the main control part to the payout control part has not reached | attained. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P stand connected to the game board development jig is connected to commercial CU by unit exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P stand connected to CU for development is connected to commercial CU by unit exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when a game machine simulator is connected to commercial CU. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (game board 6) attached to them. )).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls (also referred to as game balls) that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for emitting hitting balls. ing. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols (hereinafter also referred to as decorative symbols) synchronized with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the example of the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9 is a change display of the effect symbol, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is not limited to the change display of the effect symbol. An effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the big hit determination or the variation pattern. For example, while performing a battle effect in which an enemy ally character fights, an effect of winning a game or battle may be performed if it is a big hit, and an effect of defeating a game or battle may be performed if it is a loss . Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronization means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same, and the period of variable display is the same. When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the fourth special symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol is kept lit in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. . When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the fourth special symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is kept lit in a display color reminiscent of the big hit (for example, red).

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used. A four symbol display area may be realized. In that case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the 4th symbol may be realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the 4th symbol display area 9c, 9d corresponding to each of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is provided, for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol A common fourth symbol display area may be provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In that case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  In this embodiment, two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. Therefore, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening that is the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 7 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When a game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 starts variable display of the normal symbol. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display is started on the normal symbol display 10, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, when the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends) The first start condition is satisfied), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. . That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, when the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable symbol variable display is terminated). The second start condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. . That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a probable big hit is made, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the case of the high base state, for example, the frequency that the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased or the time that the variable winning ball device 15 is open is increased compared to the case where the high base state is not used. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In that case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the start winning state becomes easy (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time-short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  In addition, a card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a game card as a game recording medium such as a prepaid card having a prepaid function is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). .

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program, a control clock generation circuit 111, and a random number clock generation circuit 112 are mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, and a CPU 56 for performing a control operation in accordance with the program. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes random number circuits 508a and 508b that generate hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  Here, the control clock generation circuit 111 generates a control clock CCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency outside the game control microcomputer 560. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 via, for example, a control external clock terminal of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. The random number clock generation circuit 112 generates a random number clock RCLK, which is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the game control microcomputer 560. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is supplied to the random number circuits 508a and 508b via the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. 6, for example. Is done. As an example, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be equal to or lower than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111. Further, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be higher than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111.

  In this embodiment, the dedicated random number clock RCLK from the random number clock generation circuit 112 is input to the random number circuits 508a and 508b. For example, instead of using the dedicated clock, the control clock generation circuit The control clock CCLK from 111 may be input to the random number circuits 508 a and 508 b inside the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, for example, a random number counter (corresponding to the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b shown in FIG. 23) built in the random number circuits 508a and 508b may be updated using a signal obtained by dividing the control clock CCLK. The random number clock generation circuit 112 may not be provided on the main board 31.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, the entire RAM 55 is backed up. Therefore, the entire area of the RAM 55 is a backup RAM area.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. However, as will be described later, when the gaming machine is powered on or a system reset occurs, the gaming control microcomputer 560 sets the internal reset operation and the random number circuits 508a and 508b according to the setting contents of the program management area. The game setting microcomputer 560 executes the setting operation by an internal hardware circuit regardless of a program.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Has been. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  Various effect control commands are transmitted between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, for example, by serial communication only in a single direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77. . In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an effect control command via the relay board 77. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the configuration of the power supply substrate 910 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. The power supply board 910 executes or cuts off power supply to each electric component control board (main board 31, payout control board 37, presentation control board 80, etc.) and electric parts (parts that operate by receiving power) in the gaming machine. A power switch 914 is provided. Note that the power switch 914 may be provided outside the power supply board 910 in the gaming machine. When the power switch 914 is in a closed state (on state), AC power (AC 24 V) is applied to the input side (primary side) of the transformer 911. The transformer 911 is for electrically insulating the AC power supply (AC24V) and the inside of the power supply substrate 910, and its output voltage is also AC24V. A varistor 918 as an overvoltage protection circuit is installed on the input side of the transformer 911.

  The power supply board 910 is installed independently of the electric component control board, and generates a voltage used by each board and mechanism component in the gaming machine. In this example, AC24V, VSL (DC + 30V), VLP (DC + 24V), VDD (DC + 12V) and VCC (DC + 5V) are generated. Further, a capacitor 916, which is an example of a storage holding means for holding the stored contents in the backup power supply (VBB), that is, the backup RAM, is charged from DC + 5V (VCC), that is, a power supply line that drives an IC or the like on each substrate. . Further, a backflow prevention diode 917 is inserted between the +5 V line and the backup +5 V (VBB) line. Note that VSL is generated by rectifying and boosting AC 24 V with a rectifying element in the rectifying and smoothing circuit 915. VSL becomes a solenoid driving power source. VLP is a lamp lighting voltage, and is generated by rectifying AC24V with a rectifier element in the rectifier circuit 912.

  The DC-DC converter 913 serving as a power supply voltage generation unit has one or a plurality of switching regulators (two regulator ICs 924A and 924B are shown in FIG. 4), and generates VDD and VCC based on VSL. Relatively large capacitors 923A and 923B are connected to the input sides of the regulator ICs (switching regulators) 924A and 924B. Accordingly, when the power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is stopped, the DC voltages such as VSL, VDD, VCC, etc., decrease relatively slowly.

  As shown in FIG. 4, AC24V output from the transformer 911 is supplied to the connector 922B. The VLP is supplied to the connector 922C. VCC, VDD and VSL are supplied to connectors 922A, 922B and 922C.

  The cable connected to the connector 922A is connected to the main board 31. The cable connected to the connector 922B is connected to the payout control board 37. Therefore, VBB is also supplied to the connectors 922A and 922B. For example, a cable connected to the connector 922 </ b> C is connected to the lamp driver board 35. Each voltage is supplied to the effect control board 80 and the audio output board 70 via the lamp driver board 35.

  In addition, a clear switch 921 having a push button structure is mounted on the power supply board 910. When the clear switch 921 is pressed, a low level (ON state) clear signal is output and output to the main board 31 via the connector 922A. If the clear switch 921 is not pressed, a high level (off state) signal is output. The clear switch 921 may have a configuration other than the push button structure. Further, the clear switch 921 may be provided other than the power supply board 910 in the gaming machine.

  Further, the power supply board 910 generates a reset signal for the microcomputer mounted on the electric component control board and outputs a power-off signal (voltage drop signal). An output driver circuit 925 that amplifies the reset signal and outputs it to the connectors 922A, 922B, and 922C, and amplifies the power-off signal and outputs it to the connector 922B is mounted.

  The power supply monitoring circuit 920 is a circuit that realizes power supply monitoring means for outputting a power-off signal and reset signal generation means for generating a reset signal. As the power supply monitoring circuit 920, a commercially available power failure monitoring reset module IC should be used. Can do. The power supply monitoring circuit 920 has a predetermined period of time during which a predetermined voltage (for example, + 24V) used in the gaming machine is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, + 5V, but may be other values such as + 18V). For example, a power-off signal is output if it continues for 56 ms or longer. Specifically, the power-off signal is turned on (low level). In this embodiment, since the drive voltage of each switch (such as a switch for detecting a game ball) provided in the gaming machine is +12 V, a predetermined voltage value when the power-off signal is output If the voltage is set higher than + 12V, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the switch when the power supply is stopped.

  Further, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level when, for example, VCC becomes +4.5 V or less. In this embodiment, the function of outputting the power-off signal and the function of outputting the reset signal are realized by one power supply monitoring circuit 920, but they may be realized by different circuits.

  When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level on condition that a predetermined period has elapsed since the power-off signal was output (set to a low level). The predetermined period is a time sufficient for the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 to execute a power supply stop process described later. That is, after the power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs the power-off signal as the voltage drop detection signal, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer complete the execution of the power supply stop process, and then the operation stop signal (Reset signal low level) is output. Further, when power supply to the gaming machine is started and VCC exceeds +4.5 V, for example, the reset signal is set to high level.

  A power cut-off signal from the power monitor circuit 920, that is, a detection signal from the power monitor means is input to the non-maskable interrupt terminal (NMI terminal: not shown) of the game control microcomputer on the main board 31. The gaming control microcomputer can confirm that the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped by the occurrence of the non-maskable interrupt.

  In this embodiment, the power supply monitoring means monitors the output of the power supply of a predetermined potential, and the voltage from the outside of the gaming machine (this implementation) is used as a detection condition related to the stop of the supply of power supplied to the gaming machine from the outside. However, the detection condition is not limited to this, and it is possible to detect that the power from the outside has been cut off. Other conditions may be used. For example, the AC wave itself may be monitored and the AC wave may be detected as a detection condition, or the signal obtained by digitizing the AC wave may be monitored and the AC signal may be stopped when the digital signal becomes flat. May be used as a detection condition. Further, for example, a + 12V power supply voltage or a + 5V power supply voltage may be monitored, and it may be detected that the voltage has dropped to a predetermined value and a power-off signal is output. However, it is preferable to monitor a voltage higher than + 12V in order to prevent malfunction of a switch operating at + 12V.

  FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the states of AC 24 V, VSL, VCC, the reset signal, and the power-off signal when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and when power supply is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 5, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, VSL and VCC gradually reach specified values (DC + 30V and DC + 5V). At this time, when VCC exceeds the first predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 stops outputting the reset signal (sets it to a high level) and turns it off. When VSL exceeds the second predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 stops outputting the power-off signal (sets it to a high level) and turns it off. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, VSL and VCC gradually decrease. When VSL falls to the second predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs (sets to a low level) the power-off signal as an on state. When VCC decreases to the first predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs the reset signal as an ON state (sets to a low level).

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a verification block 503, a specific information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, and a reset. / Interrupt controller 506, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 56, ROM (Read Only Memory) 54, RAM (Random Access Memory) 55, free-run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509 An interrupt controller 510, a parallel input port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decoding circuit 514.

  The random number circuits installed in the game control microcomputer 560 include an 8-bit random number circuit 508a that generates an 8-bit random number and a 16-bit random number circuit 508b that generates a 16-bit random number. In the example shown in FIG. 6, an 8-bit random number circuit 508a and a 16-bit random number circuit 508b for generating a 16-bit random number are illustrated one by one. However, the game control microcomputer 560 includes an 8-bit random number circuit. 508a and 16-bit random number circuit 508b for generating 16-bit random numbers are mounted on each of four circuits (four channels). In this embodiment, the four channels of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a may be expressed as RS0 to RS3, and the four channels of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b may be expressed as RL0 to RL3.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 also includes an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit that monitors whether the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when it is detected that the user program is executed outside the designated area. The watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a time-out signal when a set period (monitoring time) elapses.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 7, the area from address 0000H to address 2FFFH is allocated to the ROM 54 of the game control microcomputer 560 and includes a program code / data area (an area for storing user programs and data) and a program management area. It is out. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the program management area in the ROM 54. The area from address F000H to address F3FFH is allocated to the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560. The area from address FE00H to address FEBFH is a built-in register area allocated to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 560. 9 to 11 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of uses and contents of main parts of the built-in register area. The area from the address FED0H to the address FEFDH is an XCS / XCSE decode area allocated to the address decode circuit 514.

  The program management area is a storage area for storing information necessary for the game control microcomputer 560 to perform various settings such as internal reset operation settings and random number circuits 508a and 508b when the system is reset. As shown in FIG. 8, the program management area includes a header (KHDR), a program code end address (KPCE), a program code start address 2 (KPCS2), a program code end address 2 (KPCE2), a reset setting (KRES), 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1), 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2), 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3), 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1), 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2), Security time setting (KSES), random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS), and the like are included. 9 to 11, the built-in register area includes a WDT start register (WST), a WDT clear register (WCL), an internal information register (CIF), various registers used in the random number circuits 508a and 508b, and the like. It is included.

  The header (KHDR) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of an 8-byte code string indicating the start of the program management area and the reading setting of internal data in the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between setting data and operation in the header (KHDR). In the game control microcomputer 560, a ROM read prevention function and a bus output mask function can be set. The ROM read prevention function is a function for permitting or prohibiting the read operation of the data stored in the ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560. When the read prohibition is set, the data stored in the ROM 54 cannot be read. The bus output mask function is an address bus output, data bus output, and control signal in the external bus interface 501 when an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 makes a read request for the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560. It is a function that disables reading of internal data from an external device by masking the output.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in accordance with the setting data set as an 8-byte code string indicating the start of the program management area, the operation combinations of the ROM read prevention function and the bus output mask function are set to be different. Of the setting data shown in FIG. 12, ROM reading is permitted, and the setting data for validating the bus output mask is also referred to as bus output mask valid data. Also, the ROM reading is prohibited, and the setting data (all “00H”) for enabling the bus output mask is also referred to as ROM reading prohibiting data. The setting data that permits ROM reading and invalidates the bus output mask is also referred to as bus output mask invalid data.

  The program code end address (KPCE) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of the final address of the program code area that continues from 0000H of the user program. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in the program code end address (KPCE).

  In this embodiment, two program code areas can be set in the program code / data area from address 0000H to address 2FBFH. Specifically, the first program code area can be set as an area from address 0000H to the address set by the program code end address (KPCE), and the second program code area is the program code start It can be set as an area from the address set by address 2 (KPCS2) to the address set by program code end address 2 (KPCE2). Hereinafter, the program code stored in the first program code area is also referred to as program code 1, and the program code stored in the second program code area is also referred to as program code 2.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the lower address of the final address of the program code 1 is set in the address 2FD3H of the program code end address (KPCE). In addition, the upper address of the final address of the program code 1 is set in the address 2FD4H.

  Program code start address 2 (KPCS2) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of the start address of the second program code area when the user program is divided into two blocks. FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in the program code start address 2 (KPCS2).

  As shown in FIG. 13B, the lower address of the head address of the program code 2 is set in the address 2FD5H of the program code start address 2 (KPCS2). In addition, the upper address of the head address of the program code 2 is set in the address 2FD6H. If the program code area is not divided into two, 0000H may be set to address 2FD5H and address 2FD6H of program code start address 2 (KPCS2).

  The program code end address 2 (KPCE2) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of the final address of the second program code area when the user program is divided into two blocks. FIG. 13C is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in the program code end address 2 (KPCE2).

  As shown in FIG. 13C, the lower address of the final address of the program code 2 is set in the address 2FD7H of the program code end address 2 (KPCE2). In addition, the upper address of the final address of the program code 2 is set in the address 2FD8H. If the program code area is not divided into two, 0000H may be set in address 2FD7H and address 2FD8H of program code end address 2 (KPCE2).

  The setting contents of the program code end address (KPCE), the program code start address 2 (KPCS2) and the program code end address 2 (KPCE2) shown in FIG. 13 are executed correctly in the designated area by the IAT circuit 506a. Referenced when monitoring whether or not. That is, the IAT circuit 506a designates from 0000H to the address indicated by the program code end address (KPCE) or from the address indicated by the program code start address 2 (KPCS2) to the address indicated by the program code end address 2 (KPCE2). It is determined whether or not the user program is being executed within the range, and an IAT signal is output based on the detection that the user program is being executed outside the specified range.

  The reset setting (KRES) stored in the program management area indicates an internal reset operation or operation permission / prohibition setting of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in the reset setting (KRES).

  Bit [7] of reset setting (KRES) is internally reset when a time-out signal is input from watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or when IAT is generated (when an IAT signal is input from IAT circuit 506a) This bit is used to set the operation when an error occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 14, when the bit value of the reset setting (KRES) bit [7] is “0”, a user reset occurs when a timeout signal or an IAT signal is input. When the bit value of the reset setting (KRES) bit [7] is “1”, a system reset occurs when a time-out signal or an IAT signal is input.

  The reset setting (KRES) bit [6] is a bit for setting the activation method of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. In the example shown in FIG. 14, when the bit value of the reset setting (KRES) bit [6] is “0”, regardless of the user program, it is automatically based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs. The watchdog timer (WDT) 506b is activated and time measurement is started. When the bit value of the reset setting (KRES) bit [6] is “1”, the time measurement is performed when the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b is started by the software (user program) after shifting to the user mode. Is started.

Bit [5-4] of reset setting (KRES) is a bit for setting a reference clock signal of watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. In the example shown in FIG. 14, when “00” is set in the bit [5-4], 2 ¹⁵ × T _SCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. When “01” is set in the bit [5-4], 2 ¹⁹ × T _SCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. When “10” is set in the bit [5-4], 2 ²² × T _SCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. When “11” is set in the bit [5-4], 2 ²⁵ × T _SCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. SCLK is an internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560, and T _SCLK indicates 1 / SCLK.

Bits [3-0] of the reset setting (KRES) are bits for setting a time-out time of the monitoring time by the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. Specifically, the time-out time of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b is set to the reference clock selected by the bit [5-4] of the reset setting (KRES), and by the bit [3-0] of the reset setting (KRES). It is a value obtained by multiplying the set value to be set. For example, the reset setting (KRES) bit [3-0] is set to “1000” (that is, the value “8” is set), and the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4] is set to “00”. In this case, the timeout time is 2 ¹⁵ × T _SCLK × 8, and when the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4] is set to “01”, the timeout time is 2 ¹⁹ × T _{When SCLK} × 8 and “10” is set in the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4], the timeout period is 2 ²² × T _SCLK × 8, and the reset setting (KRES) bit When “11” is set in [5-4], the timeout time is 2 ²⁵ × T _SCLK × 8.

Also, “1111” is set to the bit [3-0] of the reset setting (KRES) (that is, the value “15” is set), and “00” is set to the bit [5-4] of the reset setting (KRES). In this case, the timeout time is 2 ¹⁵ × T _SCLK × 15. When the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4] is set to “01”, the timeout time is 2 ¹⁹ × T. _{When SCLK} × 15 and “10” is set in the reset setting (KRES) bit [5-4], the timeout period is 2 ²² × T _SCLK × 15, and the reset setting (KRES) bit When “11” is set in [5-4], the timeout time is 2 ²⁵ × T _SCLK × 15. FIG. 14 also shows specific examples of timeout values when the internal system clock is 10.0 MHz and 12.0 MHz.

  Further, when setting not to use the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b, the CPU 56 sets “0000” in bits [3-0] of the reset setting (KRES) as shown in FIG. However, even if “0000” is set in the reset setting (KRES) bit [3-0] and the WDT 506b is set in a disabled state, the CPU 56 sets the reset setting (KRES) bit [7]. By setting, it is possible to set whether to perform system reset or user reset.

  16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1), 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2), and 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) stored in the program management area indicate settings of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1). FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2). FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3).

  The setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit “7” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is a bit for setting the activation method of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 15, when the bit value of the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “0”, after the transition to the user mode, the maximum random number is set by software (user program). By setting the value, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1 is activated. When the bit value of the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “1”, the channel 1 is automatically set based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. The 16-bit random number circuit 508b is activated.

  Bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is a bit for setting an update clock of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 15, when the bit value of the bit “6” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. . When the bit value of bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “1”, a signal obtained by dividing the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 by two is updated. Used as a clock.

  In this embodiment, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 already described is input via the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal), and the random number clock RCLK is divided by two. The signal is used as an update clock. The same applies to the 16-bit random number circuit 508b and the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of other channels.

  Bit “5-4” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is a bit for setting whether or not to change the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 15, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 is Not changed. When the bit value of the bit “5-4” is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 can be changed by software (user program). When the bit value of the bit “5-4” is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 is automatically changed from the second round, and thereafter the random number sequence makes a round. The random number sequence is automatically changed every time. When the bit value of the bit “5-4” is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 is automatically changed from the first round, and thereafter the random number sequence makes a round. The random number sequence is automatically changed every time.

  Bit “3” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is a bit for setting a starting method of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 15, when the bit value of the bit “3” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “0”, after the transition to the user mode, the maximum random number is set by software (user program). When the value is set, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 is activated. When the bit value of bit “3” is “1”, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 is automatically activated based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. .

  Bit “2” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is a bit for setting an update clock of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 15, when the bit value of the bit “2” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. . When the bit value of the bit “2” is “1”, a signal obtained by dividing the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 by 2 is used as the update clock.

  Bits “1-0” of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) are bits for setting whether or not to change the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 15, when the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 0 is Not changed. When the bit value of bits “1-0” is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 can be changed by software (user program). When the bit value of bit “1-0” is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 is automatically changed from the second round, and thereafter the random number sequence makes a round. The random number sequence is automatically changed every time. When the bit value of bits “1-0” is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 is automatically changed from the first round, and thereafter the random number sequence makes a round. The random number sequence is automatically changed every time.

  Next, setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit “7” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is a bit for setting a starting method of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 among the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of 4 channels. In the example shown in FIG. 16, when the bit value of the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “0”, after the transition to the user mode, the maximum random number is set by software (user program). When the value is set, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 is activated. When the bit value of the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “1”, the channel 3 is automatically set based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. The 16-bit random number circuit 508b is activated.

  Bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is a bit for setting an update clock of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3. In the example shown in FIG. 16, when the bit value of the bit “6” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. When the bit value of the bit “6” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “1”, the signal obtained by dividing the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 by two is updated. Used as a clock.

  Bit “5-4” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is a bit for setting whether or not to change the random number sequence updated by 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3. In the example shown in FIG. 16, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3 is Not changed. Further, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3 is software (user program). Can be changed. Further, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initialization setting 2 (KRL2) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3 is automatically started from the second round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. Further, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 16-bit random number initialization setting 2 (KRL2) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3 is automatically started from the first round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Bit “3” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is a bit for setting the activation method of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. In the example shown in FIG. 16, when the bit value of the bit “3” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “0”, after the transition to the user mode, the maximum random number is set by software (user program). By setting the value, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 is activated. When the bit value of the bit “3” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “1”, the channel 2 is automatically set based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. The 16-bit random number circuit 508b is activated.

  Bit “2” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is a bit for setting an update clock of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2. In the example shown in FIG. 16, when the bit value of bit “2” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. When the bit value of the bit “2” of the 16-bit random number initialization setting 2 (KRL2) is “1”, the signal obtained by dividing the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 by two is updated. Used as a clock.

  Bits “1-0” of 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) are bits for setting whether or not to change the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2. In the example shown in FIG. 16, when the bit value of bit “1-0” of 16-bit random number initialization 2 (KRL2) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 is Not changed. If the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 2 is software (user program). Can be changed. When the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 16-bit random number initialization setting 2 (KRL2) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 2 is automatically started from the second round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. Further, when the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 16-bit random number initialization setting 2 (KRL2) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 2 is automatically started from the first round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Next, setting contents in 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit 7 of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is a bit for setting a start value from the first round of 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 among 16-bit random number circuit 508b of 4 channels. is there. In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the bit value of the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, 0001H is used as the start value of the first round of random number update. When the bit value of the bit “7” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 as the start value of the first round of random number update. The value obtained is used. Since the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is different for each chip, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the update timing of the random number by using a value based on the ID number as the start value. It is possible to prevent an act of illegally generating a big hit aiming at. Note that the ID number itself may be used as a value based on the ID number, or a predetermined calculation (for example, a value obtained by adding or subtracting a predetermined value) may be used for the ID number.

  Bit “6” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is a bit for setting whether or not the start value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 3 is changed at each system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the bit value of the bit “6” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, the start value is not changed when the system is reset. When the bit value of the bit “6” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the start value is changed at every system reset.

  Bit “5” of 16-bit random number initialization 3 (KRL3) is a bit for setting a start value from the first round of 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 out of 4-channel 16-bit random number circuit 508b. is there. In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the bit value of the bit “5” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, 0001H is used as the start value for the first round of random number update. When the bit value of the bit “5” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 as the start value of the first round of the random number update. The value obtained is used.

  Bit “4” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is a bit for setting whether or not the start value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2 is changed every system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the bit value of the bit “4” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, the start value is not changed at the time of system reset. When the bit value of the bit “6” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the start value is changed at every system reset.

  Bit “3” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is a bit for setting a start value from the first round of 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1 out of 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. is there. In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the bit value of the bit “3” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, 0001H is used as the start value for the first round of random number update. When the bit value of bit “3” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 as the start value of the first round of random number update The value obtained is used.

  Bit “2” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is a bit for setting whether or not to change the start value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 1 at every system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the bit value “2” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, the start value is not changed at the time of system reset. When the bit value of the bit “2” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the start value is changed at every system reset.

  Bit “1” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is a bit for setting a start value from the first round of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 out of the 4-bit 16-bit random number circuit 508b. is there. In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the bit value of the bit “1” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, 0001H is used as the start value of the first round of random number update. When the bit value of the bit “1” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 as the start value of the first round of the random number update. The value obtained is used.

  Bit “0” of 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is a bit for setting whether or not to change the start value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 0 at every system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the bit value of the bit “0” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “0”, the start value is not changed at the time of system reset. When the bit value of the bit “0” of the 16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) is “1”, the CPU 56 changes the start value at each system reset.

  The 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) and the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) stored in the program management area indicate settings of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1). FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2).

  The setting contents in 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit “7” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is a bit for setting the activation method of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 1 out of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of 4 channels. In the example shown in FIG. 18, when the bit value of the bit “7” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “0”, after the transition to the user mode, the maximum random number is set by software (user program). When the value is set, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 1 is activated. When the bit value of the bit “7” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “1”, the channel 1 is automatically set based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. The 8-bit random number circuit 508a is activated.

  Bit “6” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is a bit for setting an update clock of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 18, when the bit value of the bit “6” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. When the bit value of bit “6” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “1”, the signal obtained by dividing the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 by two is updated. Used as a clock.

  Bit “5-4” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is a bit for setting whether or not to change the random number sequence updated by 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 18, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 1 is Not changed. When the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 1 is software (user program). You can change it. Further, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 1 is automatically started from the second round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. Further, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 1 is automatically started from the first round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Bit “3” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is a bit for setting the activation method of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0 out of the 4-bit random number circuit 508a of 4 channels. In the example shown in FIG. 18, when the bit value of the bit “3” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “0”, after the transition to the user mode, the maximum random number is set by software (user program). When the value is set, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0 is activated. When the bit value of the bit “3” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “1”, the channel 0 is automatically set based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. The 8-bit random number circuit 508a is activated.

  Bit “2” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is a bit for setting an update clock of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 18, when the bit value of the bit “2” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. When the bit value of the bit “2” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “1”, the signal obtained by dividing the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 by two is updated. Used as a clock.

  Bits “1-0” of 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) are bits for setting whether or not to change the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 18, when the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 0 is Not changed. If the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 0 is software (user program). Can be changed. In addition, when the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 0 is automatically started from the second round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. Further, when the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 0 is automatically started from the first round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Next, setting contents in the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) will be described with reference to FIG. Bit “7” of 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is a bit for setting the activation method of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 3 out of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of 4-channel. In the example shown in FIG. 19, when the bit value of the bit “7” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “0”, after the transition to the user mode, the maximum random number is set by software (user program). By setting the value, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 3 is activated. When the bit value of the bit “7” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “1”, the channel 3 is automatically set based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. The 8-bit random number circuit 508a is activated.

  Bit “6” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is a bit for setting an update clock of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3. In the example shown in FIG. 19, when the bit value of the bit “6” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. When the bit value of the bit “6” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “1”, the signal obtained by dividing the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 by two is updated. Used as a clock.

  Bit “5-4” of 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is a bit for setting whether or not to change the random number sequence updated by 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 3. In the example shown in FIG. 19, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3 is Not changed. If the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3 is software (user program). You can change it. Further, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3 is automatically started from the second round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. Further, when the bit value of the bit “5-4” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 3 is automatically started from the first round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Bit “3” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is a bit for setting the activation method of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2 out of the 4-bit 8-bit random number circuit 508a. In the example shown in FIG. 19, when the bit value of the bit “3” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “0”, after the transition to the user mode, the maximum random number is set by software (user program). When the value is set, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2 is activated. When the bit value of the bit “3” of the 8-bit random number initialization setting 2 (KRS2) is “1”, the channel 2 is automatically set based on the transition to the user mode when a reset occurs regardless of the user program. The 8-bit random number circuit 508a is activated.

  Bit “2” of 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is a bit for setting an update clock of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2. In the example shown in FIG. 19, when the bit value of the bit “2” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “0”, the internal system clock of the game control microcomputer 560 is used as the update clock. When the bit value of bit “2” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “1”, the signal obtained by dividing the external clock signal input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 by two is updated. Used as a clock.

  Bits “1-0” of 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) are bits for setting whether or not to change the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of channel 2. In the example shown in FIG. 19, when the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initialization setting 2 (KRS2) is “00”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 2 is Not changed. If the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “01”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 2 is software (user program). You can change it. Further, when the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “10”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 2 is automatically started from the second round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. Further, when the bit value of the bit “1-0” of the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) is “11”, the random number sequence updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a of the channel 2 is automatically started from the first round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  Note that the 8-bit random number circuit 508a is different from the 16-bit random number circuit 508b in that it does not have a function for setting a start value as shown in FIG.

  The security time setting (KSES) stored in the program management area indicates a time setting for extending the security mode. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in the security time setting (KSES).

  Bit [7-6] of security time setting (KSES) is a bit for setting a time for extending the security mode time at random. In the example shown in FIG. 20, when “01” is set in the bit [7-6] of the security time setting (KSES), the short mode is set as a mode for extending the security mode time at random. Specifically, when the internal system clock is 10.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 0.816 ms is randomly extended, and when the internal system clock is 12.0 MHz, the range of 0 to 0.51 ms. The time is extended randomly. In addition, when “10” is set in the bit [7-6] of the security time setting (KSES), the middle mode is set as a mode for randomly extending the security mode time. When the system clock is 10.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 26.112 ms is randomly extended, and when the internal system clock is 12.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 16.32 ms is randomly selected. Extended. Further, when “11” is set in the bit [7-6] of the security time setting (KSES), the long mode is set as a mode for randomly extending the security mode time. When the system clock is 10.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 855.584 ms is randomly extended, and when the internal system clock is 12.0 MHz, the time in the range of 0 to 522.24 ms is randomly selected. Extended.

  When setting so as not to perform random extension of the security mode time, as shown in FIG. 20, it is sufficient to set “00” in bits [7-6] of the security time setting (KSES).

Bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES) is a bit for setting a reference clock signal of a time for fixing and extending the security mode time. In the example shown in FIG. 20, when “0” is set in the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES), 2 ²² × T _SCLK is selected as the reference clock signal. Further, when “1” is set in the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES), 2 ²⁴ × T _SCLK is selected as the reference clock signal.

Bit [4-0] of security time setting (KSES) is a bit for setting a time to extend the security mode time in a fixed manner. Specifically, the fixed extension time of the security mode time is the set value set by the bit [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) to the reference clock selected by the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES). The value multiplied by. For example, “00001” is set in the bit [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) (that is, the value “1” is set), and “0” is set in the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES). In this case, the fixed extension time is 2 ²² × T _SCLK × 1, and when the security time setting (KSES) bit [5] is set to “1”, the fixed extension time is 2 ²⁴ × T _SCLK × 1.

Also, “01000” is set in the bit [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) (that is, the value “8” is set), and “0” is set in the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES). In this case, the fixed extension time is 2 ²² × T _SCLK × 8, and when the security time setting (KSES) bit [5] is set to “1”, the fixed extension time is 2 ²⁴ × T _SCLK X8. Also, set “10000” in bit [4-0] of security time setting (KSES) (that is, set the value “16”), and set “0” in bit [5] of security time setting (KSES). In this case, the fixed extension time is 2 ²² × T _SCLK × 16, and when the security time setting (KSES) bit [5] is set to “1”, the fixed extension time is 2 ²⁴ × T _SCLK × 16. Also, “11111” is set to the bit [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES) (that is, the value “31” is set), and “0” is set to the bit [5] of the security time setting (KSES). In this case, the fixed extension time is 2 ²² × T _SCLK × 31, and when the security time setting (KSES) bit [5] is set to “1”, the fixed extension time is 2 ²⁴ × T _SCLK × 31. FIG. 20 also shows a specific example of the value of the fixed extension time when the internal system clock is 10.0 MHz and the value of the fixed extension time when it is 12.0 MHz.

  When setting so as not to perform the fixed extension of the security mode time, as shown in FIG. 20, “00000” may be set in bits [4-0] of the security time setting (KSES).

  As shown in FIG. 20, the security mode time is randomly extended by setting bit [7-6] of security time setting (KSES) and fixed extension by setting of bit [5-0] of security time setting (KSES). The extension can be set in two ways. And the addition time of the time set by these two types of methods becomes the extension time of the final security mode time.

  The random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS) stored in the program management area indicates the setting of the monitoring frequency of the external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal). FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS).

  The bit [7-2] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS) is a fixed bit (that is, a bit that is not particularly used for setting), and all the bits are “0”.

Bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS) are input clocks when an external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) is selected as a clock for updating the random number. This is a bit for setting a frequency to be detected as a frequency abnormality. In the example shown in FIG. 21, when “00” is set in bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS), the monitoring frequency is set to less than the frequency of SCLK (internal system clock). When “01” is set in bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS), the monitoring frequency is set to less than the frequency of SCLK (internal system clock) / 2. Further, when "10" is set to bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring settings (KRCS) sets the frequency lower than the SCLK (internal system clock) / ^{2 2} as the monitoring frequency. When “11” is set in bits [1-0] of the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS), the monitoring frequency is set to a frequency less than the frequency of SCLK (internal system clock) / ^2/3 .

  When an abnormality in the monitoring frequency of the external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) is detected, “1” is set in bit 3 of the internal information register (CIF: see FIG. 22). The

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 detects an abnormal operation (external clock frequency abnormality and update abnormality) of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b out of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b. It has a function to do. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS) when the external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) is selected as the random number update clock. Based on the set monitoring frequency, it is detected whether or not the frequency of the external clock signal has decreased. If the frequency of the external clock signal has decreased (external clock frequency error), the internal information register (CIF ) Is set to "1".

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of monitoring the update state of the random number of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, and when an abnormality is detected in the update state (for example, the random number value is not updated with the same value, If the random number is counted up one by one and the random number is suddenly detected to have increased by 2 or more), the correspondence among bits 7 to 4 of the internal information register (CIF) Set “1” to the bit to be used.

  In this embodiment, the monitoring frequency of the external clock signal to be monitored is set with respect to detection of abnormal operation of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b by setting using the random number clock monitoring setting (KRCS). Alternatively, it may be possible to set whether or not the external clock frequency abnormality detection itself is performed, or whether or not the update abnormality detection itself is performed. In that case, the setting of whether or not the external clock frequency abnormality detection itself is performed and the setting of whether or not the update abnormality detection itself is performed may be performed independently. It may be possible to only enable or disable.

  In addition, in order to be able to set whether to detect external clock frequency abnormality itself or whether to perform update abnormality detection itself, for example, it is set whether to start the random number circuit itself, If it is set so as not to start up, it is virtually impossible to detect external clock frequency abnormality or update abnormality, so it is set not to detect external clock frequency abnormality or update abnormality. Become. As described above, setting whether or not to detect the external clock frequency abnormality itself or whether or not to detect the update abnormality itself includes realizing whether or not to start the random number circuit itself. It is a concept.

  In this embodiment, the dedicated random number clock RCLK is input from the random number clock generation circuit 112 to the random number circuits 508a and 508b. For example, the control clock CCLK from the control clock generation circuit 111 is input. Even when a clock other than the dedicated random number clock RCLK is input, it is possible to detect an external clock frequency abnormality or an update abnormality. Regarding detection of update abnormality in the random number circuit, the random number is updated using the dedicated random number clock RCLK from the random number clock generation circuit 112 and another clock such as the control clock CCLK from the control clock generation circuit 111 is used. The random number may be set only in one of the cases where the random number is updated.

  In this embodiment, the abnormality of the external clock frequency is detected and the abnormality of the internal system clock SCLK of the game control microcomputer 560 is not particularly detected. The reason is as follows. is there. That is, when the internal system clock SCLK is used for updating the random number, the operation of the CPU 56 itself should have stopped in a situation where an abnormality has occurred in the internal system clock SCLK. However, there is no possibility that only the update of the random number is stopped and there is no possibility that some problem will occur. However, when the external clock signal is used for the update of the random number, the CPU 56 is operating. There is a possibility that only the random number update is stopped.

  The external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 includes an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the game control microcomputer 560, an address bus, a data bus, and each control signal. A bus interface having a direction control function and the like. For example, the external bus interface 501 is connected to an external memory or an external input / output device externally attached to the game control microcomputer 560, and an address signal, a data signal, various control signals, etc. are connected to these external devices. As long as it transmits and receives.

  The clock circuit 502 included in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the oscillation signal input to the control external clock terminal EX by two. The generated internal system clock is output from the external output terminal (CLKO terminal) to the outside.

  The verification block 503 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to an external verification machine and has a function of performing chip verification.

  The unique information storage circuit 504 included in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the game control microcomputer 560, for example. As an example, the unique information storage circuit 504 stores three kinds of unique information such as a ROM code, a chip individual number, and an ID number. The ROM 54 code is a 4-byte numerical value generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 54, and four numerical values with different generation methods may be prepared. The chip individual number is a 4-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 560 is manufactured, and is a numerical value that is different for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 560. The ID number is an 8-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 560 is manufactured, and is a numerical value different for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 560. The chip individual number can be read from the user program, but the ID number may be set so that it cannot be read from the user program. Note that the unique information storage circuit 504 may be included in the ROM 54. The unique information storage circuit 504 may be included in the CPU 56 (specifically, a built-in register).

  An arithmetic circuit 505 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit for controlling various resets (specifically, reset signals) and interrupt requests generated inside and outside the game control microcomputer 560. . Resets controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 506 include system resets and user resets. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal is input to the external system reset terminal XSRST for a certain period. In this embodiment, the system reset is also performed when a watchdog timer (WDT) time-out signal is generated due to the reset setting (KRES), or when travel outside the designated area is prohibited (IAT). May occur. The user reset is a reset that occurs due to a predetermined factor, such as a watchdog timer (WDT) time-out signal is generated or an out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) is generated.

  Interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 506 include a non-maskable interrupt NMI and a maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 56 is in an interrupt disabled state, and is an interrupt that is generated when a low level signal is input to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as the input port PI6) for a certain period. is there. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a setting instruction of the CPU 56, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority. The cause of the maskable interrupt INT is that a low level signal is input to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as the input port PI5) for a certain period of time, a time-out occurs by the timer circuit 509, and the serial communication circuit 512 receives data A plurality of types of interrupt factors may be determined in advance, such as the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to reception or data transmission, or the occurrence of an interrupt factor related to the acquisition of numerical data in which the random number circuits 508a and 508b are random numbers.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 uses the internal information register CIF (address FE25H) among the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 to control interrupts and manage resets. Do. The internal information register CIF is a register for managing a reset factor generated immediately before, reading a random number update state, and a state of an input frequency when the random number update clock is an external clock.

  FIG. 22A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the internal information register CIF. FIG. 22B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data set in the internal information register CIF. The internal information data RL3ER set in the bit number [7] of the internal information register CIF indicates an abnormality in the update state of the 16-bit random number RL3 updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 3. In the example shown in FIG. 22B, when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL3 is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data RL3ER becomes “0”, but when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL3 is detected. The bit value becomes “1”. The internal information data RL2ER set in the bit of bit number [6] of the internal information register CIF (hereinafter simply expressed as “bit number [6]”) is stored in the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of channel 2. Indicates an abnormality in the update state of the 16-bit random number RL2 to be updated. In the example shown in FIG. 22B, when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL2 is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data RL2ER becomes “0”, but when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL2 is detected The bit value becomes “1”. The internal information data RL1ER set in the bit number [5] of the internal information register CIF indicates an abnormality in the update state of the 16-bit random number RL1 updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1. In the example shown in FIG. 22B, when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL1 is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data RL1ER becomes “0”, but when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL1 is detected. The bit value becomes “1”. The internal information data RL0ER set in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF indicates an abnormality in the update state of the 16-bit random number RL0 updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 0. In the example shown in FIG. 22B, when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL0 is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data RL0ER becomes “0”, but when the update abnormality of the 16-bit random number RL0 is detected. The bit value becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as the initial value in the bit number [7-4] of the internal information register CIF.

  The internal information data RCER set in the bit number [3] of the internal information register CIF is obtained when the external clock signal input from the random number external clock terminal (RCK terminal) is selected as the random number update clock. Indicates a frequency error in the external clock signal. In the example shown in FIG. 22B, when the frequency abnormality of the external clock signal is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data RCER becomes “0”, but when the frequency abnormality of the external clock signal is detected, The bit value becomes “1”. Note that the bit number [3] of the internal information register CIF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The internal information data SRSF set in the bit number [2] of the internal information register CIF indicates that the reset factor generated immediately before is a system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 22B, when the immediately preceding reset factor is not a system reset (system reset has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data SRSF is “0”, but when the system reset is a system reset (system reset) When the reset occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. Note that “1” is set as the initial value in the bit number [2] of the internal information register CIF.

  The internal information data WDTF set in the bit number [1] of the internal information register CIF indicates that the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to the input of a timeout signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. In the example shown in FIG. 22B, the bit value of the internal information data WDTF becomes “0” when the reset factor immediately before is not the user reset by the timeout signal (the user reset by the timeout signal has not occurred). When it is a user reset by a signal (a user reset is generated by a timeout signal), the bit value becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the bit number [1] of the internal information register CIF.

  Internal information data IATF set in bit number [0] of internal information register CIF indicates that the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to the input of an IAT generation signal from IAT circuit 506a. In the example shown in FIG. 22B, the bit value of the internal information data IATF becomes “0” when the immediately preceding reset factor is not a user reset by the IAT generation signal (user reset has not occurred by the IAT generation signal). When the user reset is performed by the IAT generation signal (user reset is generated by the IAT generation signal), the bit value becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as the initial value in the bit number [0] of the internal information register CIF.

  The CPU 56 included in the game control microcomputer 560 executes a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 54, thereby executing game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. CPU. When the game control is executed, the CPU 56 reads the fixed data from the ROM 54, the variable data writing operation in which the CPU 56 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 55 and temporarily stores it, and the CPU 56 is temporarily stored in the RAM 55. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading out various fluctuating data, receiving operation in which the CPU 56 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 560 via the external bus interface 501, parallel input port 511, serial communication circuit 512, etc. The CPU 56 also performs a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like.

  The ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like.

  The RAM 55 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 55 may be a backup RAM that is backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply board 910. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period.

  The game control microcomputer 560 is equipped with four channels of 8-bit free-run counters as the free-run counter circuit 507.

  The random number circuits 508a and 508b included in the game control microcomputer 560 are circuits that generate numerical data used as random number values (8-bit random numbers and 16-bit random numbers) having a predetermined update range. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b among the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a big hit determination random number (random R) for determining whether or not to make a big hit. The CPU 56 uses the random counter different from the random number circuits 508a and 508b on the basis of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuits 508a and 508b, and processes and updates various numerical data by software to be used in the game. Numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values to be obtained may be counted. The CPU 56 may count (update) a part of numerical data indicating a random value such as a big hit determination random number by software without using the random number circuits 508a and 508b. As an example, the CPU 56 updates the numerical data indicating the big hit determination random number (random R) by processing the numerical data extracted from the random number circuits 508a and 508b by software, and other random values (for example, the big win) The numerical data indicating the type determination random number, the variation pattern type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number) may be updated by software.

  FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a. FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b are random number sequence change selection circuits 523a and 523b, random number generation circuits 525a and 525b, random number sequence change circuits 526a and 526b, and a maximum value. Comparing circuits 527a and 527b are provided. In addition to the components included in the 8-bit random number circuit 508a, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b includes a random number start value selection circuit 535, as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b includes an update monitoring circuit 537 in addition to the components included in the 8-bit random number circuit 508a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, only the configuration of the circuit portion of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b is shown, and description of each register used by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b other than the random number sequence change register 522 and the maximum value setting register 524b is omitted. doing. Specifically, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b replaces the RS hard latch selection registers 528a and 528b shown in FIG. 23 with the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0) to the RL3 hard latch selection register (RL3LS) shown in FIG. ), Instead of the RS0 hard latch random value register 529a to RS3 hard latch random value register 529d shown in FIG. 23, the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) to RL3 hard latch random value register shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 1 (RL3HV1) is used, and instead of the RS hard latch flag register 530 shown in FIG. 23, RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) to RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) shown in FIG. RS interrupt control register RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) to RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) shown in FIG. 9 is used instead of 531, and instead of RS0 soft latch random value register 533a to RS3 soft latch random value register 533d shown in FIG. The RL0 soft latch random value register (RL0SV) to RL3 soft latch random value register (RL3SV) shown in FIG. 10 are used. The 16-bit random number circuit 508b uses the same register as the 8-bit random number circuit 508a for the random value soft latch register 532 and the random number soft latch flag register 534.

  The 8-bit random number circuit 508a is an 8-bit random number initial setting 521a (8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) and 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) shown in FIG. 8) provided in the program management area described above. Operates according to the set contents.

  The 16-bit random number circuit 508b is a 16-bit random number initial setting 521b (16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) to 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) shown in FIG. 8) provided in the program management area already described. Operates according to the set contents. In addition to the function of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b sets the 16-bit random number initial setting 536 (16-bit random number initial setting 3 (KRL3) shown in FIG. 8). By operating according to the contents, it has a function of changing the start value of the random number value in the first round (see FIG. 17).

  In the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, the random number generation circuit 525b includes an update monitoring circuit 537. In addition to the function of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a, the update monitoring circuit 537 operates to cause an external clock frequency abnormality and an update abnormality. (See FIG. 21). In this embodiment, an external clock frequency abnormality and an update abnormality are detected by one update monitoring circuit 537, but a monitoring circuit for detecting an external clock frequency abnormality and a monitoring circuit for detecting an update abnormality are provided separately. It may be done.

  Note that the 8-bit random number circuit 508a may also be configured to include an update monitoring circuit so that an external clock frequency abnormality and an update abnormality of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a can be detected.

  The random number sequence change register 522 corresponds to the random number sequence change register RDSC included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. As the random number sequence change register RDSC, a common register is used in each channel of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b.

  The maximum value setting registers 524a and 524b correspond to the RS0 maximum value setting register (RS0MX) to the RS3 maximum value setting register (RS3MX) included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. (In the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, it corresponds to the RL0 maximum value setting register (RL0MX) to the RL3 maximum value setting register (RL3MX)).

  The hard latch selection register 528a corresponds to the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. The hard latch selection register 528b corresponds to the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. Note that the 16-bit random number circuit 508b corresponds to the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0) to RL3 hard latch selection register 3 (RL3LS) shown in FIG.

  The RS0 hard latch random value registers 529a to RS3 hard latch random value registers 529d are RS0 hard latch random value registers (RS0HV) to RS3 hard latches included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. It corresponds to the random value register (RS3HV). In the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) to RL1 hard latch random value register 1 (RL1HV1) shown in FIG. 10 and the RL2 hard latch random value register 0 (RL2HV0) shown in FIG. ) To RL3 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL3HV1).

  The RS hard latch flag register 530 corresponds to the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) shown in FIG. Note that the 16-bit random number circuit 508b corresponds to RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) to RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) shown in FIG.

  The RS interrupt control register 531 corresponds to the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) shown in FIG. Note that the 16-bit random number circuit 508b corresponds to the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) to the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) shown in FIG.

  The random value soft latch register 532 corresponds to the random number soft latch register (RDSL) shown in FIG. As the soft latch register RDSL, a common register is used in each channel of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b.

  The RS0 soft latch random value registers 533a to RS3 soft latch random value registers 533d correspond to the RS0 soft latch random value registers (RS0SV) to RS3 soft latch random value registers (RS3SV) shown in FIG. Note that the 16-bit random number circuit 508b corresponds to the RL0 soft latch random value (RL0SV) to the RL3 soft latch random value (RL3SV) shown in FIG.

  The random number soft latch flag register 534 corresponds to the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) shown in FIG. As the random number soft latch flag register RDSF, a common register is used in each channel of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the 16-bit random number circuit 508b.

  The random number sequence change selection circuits 523a and 523b follow the setting contents of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) and the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 (in the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b). According to the setting contents of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) and 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the change method of the random number sequence is “do not change”, “change by software” , “Automatically change from the second lap” or “Automatically change from the first lap” is selected. Then, when any one of “change by software”, “automatic change from the second round” or “automatic change from the first round” is selected, the random number sequence changing circuits 526a and 526b receive random numbers according to the selection method. Change the column. Further, when “Do not change” is selected, control for changing the random number sequence is not performed.

  The random number sequence changing circuits 526a and 526b are circuits that allow the permutation of numerical data generated by the random number generating circuits 525a and 525b to be changed in accordance with instructions from the random number sequence change selecting circuits 523a and 523b. For example, when “change by software” is instructed, the random number sequence change circuits 526a and 526b change the random number sequence updated by the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b by software (user program). In addition, for example, when “automatic change from the second round” is instructed, the random number sequence change circuits 526a and 526b automatically change the random number sequence updated by the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b from the second round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed. In addition, for example, when “automatic change from the first round” is instructed, the random number sequence change circuits 526a and 526b automatically change the random number sequence updated by the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b from the first round. Thereafter, the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is completed.

  The random number generation circuits 525a and 525b are constituted by, for example, an 8-bit counter (in the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, a 16-bit counter), and the like, and predetermined numerical data can be updated based on an input of a random number update clock signal or the like. In the range, the circuit cyclically updates from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value. For example, the random number generation circuits 525a and 525b add one by one from the initial value set in the range from “0” to “255” in response to the falling edge in the random number update clock signal. The numerical data is counted up (in the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, the numerical data is incremented by 1 from the initial value set within the range of “0” to “65535” to “65535”. Count up) Then, after counting up to “255”, the numerical data is cyclically updated by adding 1 from “0” to a final value that is 1 smaller than the initial value.

  The maximum value comparison circuits 527a and 527b follow the setting contents of the 8-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRS1) and the 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2) shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 (in the case of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, According to the setting contents of 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (KRL1) and 16-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRL2) shown in FIG. 15 and FIG.

  FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0). FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0). The data RL01RF set in the bit number [7] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0) is obtained when the value of the 16-bit random number RL0 is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 1 (RL0HV1) by external terminal input. Indicates the setting of conditions. In the example shown in FIG. 25B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RL01RF becomes “0”, and the next value is not read. Is set to be latched, its bit value becomes “1”. The data RL01RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  In this embodiment, regarding the register of the program management area and the built-in register, specifically, by setting the corresponding bit of the program management area or the like to a value of “0” or “1”, The corresponding bit value is read, and the read “0” or “1” value is written to the control register of the game control microcomputer 560 by hardware, and various settings are made. For example, for bit 7 of RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0), if the value read from bit 7 is “0”, the control register of gaming control microcomputer 560 is “hardware” When a value is not read from the RL0 hard latch random value register 1 (RL0HV1) by writing “0”, the next value is not latched, and the value read from bit 7 is “1”. Is set to latch the next value without reading the value from the RL0 hard latch random value register 1 (RL0HV1) by writing “1” to the control register of the game control microcomputer 560 in hardware. Is done. The same applies to each setting item in other program management areas and each bit of each register of the built-in register.

  The data RL01LS0 to RL01LS2 set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0) is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 1 (RL0HV1) at any external terminal, and the 16-bit random number RL0. Indicates whether to import values. In the example shown in FIG. 25B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0), the setting is invalid. In addition, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RL01LS0 to RL01LS2.

  The data RL00RF set in the bit number [3] of the RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0) is used when the value of the 16-bit random number RL0 is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) by external terminal input. Indicates the setting of conditions. In the example shown in FIG. 25B, the bit value of the data RL00RF becomes “0” when the next value is not latched unless the value is read. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL00RF.

  The data RL00LS0 to RL00LS2 set in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0) is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) at any external terminal, and the 16-bit random number RL0. Indicates whether to import values. In the example shown in FIG. 25B, when “000” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. When “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0), the setting is invalid. Further, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RL00LS0 to RL00LS2.

  FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1). FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1). The data RL03RF set in the bit number [7] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is used when the value of the 16-bit random number RL0 is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 3 (RL0HV3) by an external terminal input. Indicates the setting of conditions. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, the bit value of the data RL03RF becomes “0” when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless the value is read. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL03RF.

  The data RL03LS0 to RL03LS2 set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 3 (RL0HV3) at any external terminal input, and the 16-bit random number RL0. Indicates whether to import values. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. When “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1), the setting is invalid. In addition, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RL03LS0 to RL03LS2.

  The data RL02RF set in the bit number [3] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is used when the value of the 16-bit random number RL0 is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 2 (RL0HV2) by external terminal input. Indicates the setting of conditions. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RL02RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL02RF.

  The data RL02LS0 to RL02LS2 set in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is input to the RL0 hard latch random value register 2 (RL0HV2) at any external terminal input, and the 16-bit random number RL0 Indicates whether to import values. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, when the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1) is set to “000”, the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RL0 hard latch selection register 1 (RL0LS1), the setting is invalid. In addition, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RL02LS0 to RL02LS2.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS). FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS). In FIG. 27, n takes a value from 0 to 3. Data RLn1RF set in the bit number [7] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS) is a condition when the value of the 16-bit random number RLn is input to the RLn hard latch random number value register 1 (RLnHV1) by external terminal input. Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 27B, the bit value of the data RLn1RF becomes “0” when the next value is not latched unless the value is read. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value becomes “1”. The data RLn1RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RLn1LS0 to RLn1LS2 set in the bit number [6-4] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS) is the value of the 16-bit random number RLn at any external terminal input to the RLn hard latch random value register 1 (RLnHV1). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 27B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. In this case, the PI1 terminal is selected. When “010” is set, the PI2 terminal is selected. When “011” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected. When “100” is set. When the PI4 terminal is selected and “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), the setting is invalid. In addition, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RLn1LS0 to RLn1LS2.

  Data RLn0RF set in the bit number [3] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS) is a condition when the value of the 16-bit random number RLn is input to the RLn hard latch random value register 0 (RLnHV0) by external terminal input Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 27B, if the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RLn0RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RLn0RF.

  The data RLn0LS0 to RLn0LS2 set in the bit number [2-0] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS) is the value of the 16-bit random number RLn at any external terminal input to the RLn hard latch random value register 0 (RLnHV0). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 27B, when “000” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. In this case, the PI1 terminal is selected. When “010” is set, the PI2 terminal is selected. When “011” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected. When “100” is set. When the PI4 terminal is selected and “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RLn hard latch selection register (RLnLS), the setting is invalid. In addition, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RLn0LS0 to RLn0LS2.

  FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0). FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0). Data RS1RF set in the bit number [7] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is a condition for taking in the value of the 8-bit random number RS1 to the RS1 hard latch random value register (RS1HV) by external terminal input Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, the bit value of the data RS1RF becomes “0” when the next value is not latched unless the value is read. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value becomes “1”. The data RS1RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1LS0 to RS1LS2 set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is the value of the 8-bit random number RS1 at any external terminal input to the RS1 hard latch random value register (RS1HV). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0), the setting is invalid. In addition, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RS1LS0 to RS1LS2.

  Data RS0RF set in the bit number [3] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is a condition when the value of the 8-bit random number RS0 is input to the RS0 hard latch random number value register (RS0HV) by external terminal input Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless a value is read, the bit value of the data RS0RF becomes “0”. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value becomes “1”. The data RS0RF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS0LS0 to RS0LS2 set in the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is the value of the 8-bit random number RS0 at any external terminal input to the RS0 hard latch random value register (RS0HV). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0) is set to “000”, the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS0), the setting is invalid. In addition, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RS0LS0 to RS0LS2.

  FIG. 29A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1). FIG. 29B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1). Data RS3RF set in the bit number [7] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) is a condition when the value of the 8-bit random number RS3 is input to the RS3 hard latch random value register (RS3HV) by external terminal input Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 29B, the bit value of the data RS3RF becomes “0” when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless the value is read. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RS3RF.

  The data RS3LS0 to RS3LS2 set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) is the value of the 8-bit random number RS3 at any external terminal input to the RS3 hard latch random value register (RS3HV). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 29B, when “000” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1), the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [6-4] of the RS hard latch selection register 0 (RSLS1), the setting is invalid. In addition, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RS3LS0 to RS3LS2.

  Data RS2RF set in the bit number [3] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) is a condition when the value of the 8-bit random number RS2 is input to the RS2 hard latch random value register (RS2HV) by external terminal input. Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 29B, the bit value of the data RS2RF becomes “0” when setting is made so that the next value is not latched unless the value is read. When the value is set to be latched, the bit value becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RS2RF.

  The data RS2LS0 to RS2LS2 set in the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) is the value of the 8-bit random number RS2 at any external terminal input to the RS2 hard latch random value register (RS2HV). Indicates whether to capture. In the example shown in FIG. 29B, when the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1) is set to “000”, the PI0 terminal is selected and “001” is set. When the PI1 terminal is selected, the PI2 terminal is selected when “010” is set, the PI3 terminal is selected when “011” is set, and “100” is set. In this case, the PI4 terminal is selected, and when “101” is set, the PI5 / XINT terminal is selected. If “110” or “111” is set in the bit number [2-0] of the RS hard latch selection register 1 (RSLS1), the setting is invalid. In addition, “000” is set as an initial value in the data RS2LS0 to RS2LS2.

  FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0). FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0). Note that the bit value of the bit [7-6] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) is always set to “0”.

  The data RL11IE set in the bit number [5] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is captured in the RL1 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL1HV1). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL11IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . The data RL11IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL10IE set in the bit number [4] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL1 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL1HV0). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL10IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . The data RL10IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL03IE set in the bit number [3] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random number value register 3 (RL0HV3). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL03IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL03IE.

  The data RL02IE set in the bit number [2] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random number value register 2 (RL0HV2). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL02IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL02IE.

  The data RL01IE set in the bit number [1] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL0HV1). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL01IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL01IE.

  The data RL00IE set in the bit number [1] of the RL interrupt control register 0 (RLIC0) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL00IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL00IE.

  FIG. 31A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1). FIG. 31B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1). Note that the bit values of the bits [7-6] and [3-2] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) are always “0”.

  The data RL31IE set in the bit number [5] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL3 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL3HV1). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 31B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL31IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . The data RL31IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL30IE set in the bit number [4] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that a random value is taken into the RL3 hard latch random value register 0 (RL3HV0). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 31B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL30IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . The data RL30IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL21IE set in the bit number [1] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) prohibits / permits an interrupt due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RL2 hard latch random number value register 1 (RL2HV1). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 31B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL21IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . The data RL21IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL20IE set in the bit number [0] of the RL interrupt control register 1 (RLIC1) is prohibited / permitted for interrupts caused by the random number value taken into the RL2 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL2HV0). Indicates the setting. In the example shown in FIG. 31B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RL20IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . The data RL20IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 32A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC). FIG. 32B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RS interrupt control register (RSIC). The RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is a register that is shared by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the free-run counter circuit 507, and bits [7-4] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) are free-run. The settings related to the hard latch registers (FRC0 hard latch register (FR0HV) to FRC3 hard latch register (FR3HV)) used by the counter circuit 507 are shown.

  The data RS3IE set in the bit number [3] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is set to disable / permit interrupts caused by the fact that the random number value is taken into the RS3 hard latch random number value register (RS3HV). Indicates. In the example shown in FIG. 32B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RS3IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RS3IE.

  The data RS2IE set in the bit number [2] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is set to disable / enable interrupts due to the fact that the random value is taken into the RS2 hard latch random number value register (RS2HV). Indicates. In the example shown in FIG. 32B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RS2IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . The data RS2IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1IE set in the bit number [1] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is set to disable / permit interrupts due to the fact that the random number value is taken into the RS1 hard latch random number value register (RS1HV). Indicates. In the example shown in FIG. 32B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RS1IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . The data RS1IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS0IE set in the bit number [0] of the RS interrupt control register (RSIC) is set to disable / permit interrupts due to the fact that the random value is taken into the RS0 hard latch random number value register (RS0HV). Indicates. In the example shown in FIG. 32B, when the interrupt is disabled, the bit value of the data RS0IE becomes “0”, but when the interrupt is enabled, the bit value becomes “1”. . The data RS0IE is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RLn maximum value setting register (RLnMX). FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RLn maximum value setting register (RLnMX). In FIG. 33, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 33B, the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn is set in the data RLnMX15 to RLnMX0 set in the bit number [15-0] of the RLn maximum value setting register (RLnMX).

  FIG. 34A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RSn maximum value setting register (RSnMX). FIG. 34B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RSn maximum value setting register (RSnMX). In FIG. 34, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 34B, the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn is set in the data RSnMX7 to RSnMX0 set in the bit number [7-0] of the RSn maximum value setting register (RSnMX).

  FIG. 35A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a random number sequence change register (RDSC). FIG. 35B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the random number sequence change register (RDSC). Data RS3SC set in the bit number [7] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of the 8-bit random number RS3. In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RS3SC becomes “0”, but when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. It should be noted that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RS3SC.

  The data RS2SC set in the bit number [6] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of the 8-bit random number RS2. In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RS2SC is “0”, but when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as the initial value in the data RS2SC.

  Data RS1SC set in the bit number [5] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of the 8-bit random number RS1. In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RS1SC becomes “0”, but when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value thereof is changed. Becomes “1”. It should be noted that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RS1SC.

  The data RS0SC set in the bit number [4] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of the 8-bit random number RS0. In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RS0SC becomes “0”, but when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value thereof is changed. Becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RS0SC.

  Data RL3SC set in bit number [3] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of 16-bit random number RL3. In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RL3SC is “0”, but when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL3SC.

  Data RL2SC set in the bit number [2] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of the 16-bit random number RL2. In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RL2SC becomes “0”, but when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL2SC.

  Data RL1SC set in the bit number [1] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of the 16-bit random number RL1. In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RL1SC is “0”, but when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL1SC.

  Data RL0SC set in bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register (RDSC) indicates a random number sequence change request bit of 16-bit random number RL0. In the example shown in FIG. 35B, when the random number sequence is set not to be changed, the bit value of the data RL0SC is “0”, but when the random number sequence is set to be changed, the bit value is set. Becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL0SC.

  FIG. 36A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a random number soft latch register (RDSL). FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the random number soft latch register (RDSL). The data RS3SL set in the bit number [7] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 8-bit random number RS3 into the RS3 soft latch random number value register (RS3SV). In the example shown in FIG. 36B, the bit value of the data RS3SL becomes “0” when it is set not to take in the random number value, but the bit value when it is set to change the random number sequence. Becomes “1”. The data RS3SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS2SL set in the bit number [6] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random value of the 8-bit random number RS2 into the RS2 soft latch random value register (RS2SV). In the example shown in FIG. 36B, the bit value of the data RS2SL becomes “0” when it is set not to take in the random number value, but the bit value when it is set to change the random number sequence. Becomes “1”. The data RS2SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1SL set to the bit number [5] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random value of the 8-bit random number RS1 into the RS1 soft latch random value register (RS1SV). In the example shown in FIG. 36B, the bit value of the data RS1SL becomes “0” when it is set not to take in the random number value, but the bit value when it is set to change the random number sequence. Becomes “1”. The data RS1SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS0SL set in the bit number [4] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random value of the 8-bit random number RS0 into the RS0 soft latch random value register (RS0SV). In the example shown in FIG. 36B, the bit value of the data RS0SL becomes “0” when it is set not to take in the random number value, but the bit value when it is set to change the random number sequence. Becomes “1”. The data RS0SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL3SL set in the bit number [3] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 16-bit random number RL3 into the RL3 soft latch random value register (RL3SV). In the example shown in FIG. 36B, the bit value of the data RL3SL becomes “0” when the random number value is set not to be captured, but the bit value is set when the random number sequence is changed. Becomes “1”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL3SL.

  Data RL2SL set to bit number [2] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 16-bit random number RL2 into the RL2 soft latch random number value register (RL2SV). In the example shown in FIG. 36B, the bit value of the data RL2SL becomes “0” when the random number value is set not to be taken in, but the bit value is set when the random number sequence is set to be changed. Becomes “1”. The data RL2SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL1SL set to the bit number [1] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 16-bit random number RL1 into the RL1 soft latch random number value register (RL1SV). In the example shown in FIG. 36B, the bit value of the data RL1SL becomes “0” when the random value is set not to be taken in, but the bit value is set when the random number sequence is changed. Becomes “1”. The data RL1SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL0SL set to the bit number [0] of the random number soft latch register (RDSL) indicates a bit for taking the random number value of the 16-bit random number RL0 into the RL0 soft latch random number value register (RL0SV). In the example shown in FIG. 36B, the bit value of the data RL0SL becomes “0” when the random value is set not to be taken in, but the bit value is set when the random number sequence is changed. Becomes “1”. The data RL0SL is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 37A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a random number soft latch flag register (RDSF). FIG. 37B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF). The data RS3SF set in the bit number [7] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RS3 soft latch random value register (RS3SV). In the example shown in FIG. 37B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS3SF is “0”, but when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “ 1 ”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RS3SF.

  The data RS2SF set in the bit number [6] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value has been taken into the RS2 soft latch random value register (RS2SV). In the example shown in FIG. 37B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS2SF becomes “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RS2SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1SF set in the bit number [5] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RS1 soft latch random value register (RS1SV). In the example shown in FIG. 37B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS1SF becomes “0”, but when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RS1SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS0SF set in the bit number [4] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value has been taken into the RS0 soft latch random value register (RS0SV). In the example shown in FIG. 37B, when the random number value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS0SF is “0”, but when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RS0SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL3SF set in the bit number [3] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RL3 soft latch random number value register (RL3SV). In the example shown in FIG. 37B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL3SF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL3SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL2SF set in the bit number [2] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value has been taken into the RL2 soft latch random number value register (RL2SV). In the example shown in FIG. 37B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL2SF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL2SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL1SF set in the bit number [1] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RL1 soft latch random value register (RL1SV). In the example shown in FIG. 37B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL1SF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL1SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL0SF set in the bit number [0] of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF) indicates that the random number value has been taken into the RL0 soft latch random value register (RL0SV). In the example shown in FIG. 37B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL0SF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL0SF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 38A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RLn soft latch random value register (RLnSV). FIG. 38B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RLn soft latch random number value register (RLnSV). In FIG. 38, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 38B, the data RLnSV15 to RLnSV0 set in the bit number [15-0] of the RLn soft latch random number value register (RLnSV) are 16 bits taken by the random number soft latch register (RDSL). The value of the random number RLn is set. When a random number value is fetched, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF).

  FIG. 39A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an RSn soft latch random value register (RSnSV). FIG. 39B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RSn soft latch random value register (RSnSV). In FIG. 39, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 39B, the data RSnSV7 to RSnSV0 set in the bit number [7-0] of the RSn soft latch random value register (RSnSV) are 8 bits taken by the random number soft latch register (RDSL). The value of the random number RSn is set. When a random number value is fetched, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the random number soft latch flag register (RDSF).

  FIG. 40A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0). FIG. 40B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0). The bit value of bit [7-6] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) is always “0”.

  The data RL11HF set in the bit number [5] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that the random value is taken into the RL1 hard latch random value register 1. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL11HF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL11HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL10HF set in the bit number [4] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that the random value is taken into the RL1 hard latch random value register 0. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL10HF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL10HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL03HF set in the bit number [3] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that the random value has been taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 3. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL03HF is “0”, but when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL03HF.

  The data RL02HF set in the bit number [2] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that the random value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 2. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL02HF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. It should be noted that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL02HF.

  The data RL01HF set in the bit number [1] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that the random value is taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 1. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL01HF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL01HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  Data RL00HF set in the bit number [0] of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0) indicates that a random value has been taken into the RL0 hard latch random value register 0. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL00HF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the data RL00HF.

  FIG. 41A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1). FIG. 41B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1). The bit values of the bits [7-6] and [3-2] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) are always “0”.

  The data RL31HF set in the bit number [5] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) indicates that a random value has been taken into the RL3 hard latch random value register 1. In the example shown in FIG. 41B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL31HF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL31HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL30HF set in the bit number [4] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) indicates that a random value has been taken into the RL3 hard latch random value register 0. In the example shown in FIG. 41B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL30HF becomes “0”, but when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL30HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL21HF set in the bit number [1] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) indicates that a random number value is taken into the RL2 hard latch random value register 1. In the example shown in FIG. 41B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL21HF is “0”. However, when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL21HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RL20HF set in the bit number [1] of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1) indicates that a random value has been taken into the RL2 hard latch random value register 0. In the example shown in FIG. 41B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RL20HF is “0”, but when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RL20HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 42A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF). FIG. 42B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF). The RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) is a register that is used in common by the 8-bit random number circuit 508a and the free-run counter circuit 507, and bits [7-4] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) are: The settings relating to the hard latch registers (FRC0 hard latch register (FR0HV) to FRC3 hard latch register (FR3HV)) used by the free-run counter circuit 507 are shown.

  The data RS3HF set in the bit number [3] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) indicates that the random number value is taken into the RS3 hard latch random value register (RS3HV). In the example shown in FIG. 42B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS3HF is “0”, but when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “ 1 ”. The data RS3HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS2HF set in the bit number [2] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) indicates that a random value is taken into the RS2 hard latch random value register (RS2HV). In the example shown in FIG. 42B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS2HF is “0”, but when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “ 1 ”. The data RS2HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS1HF set in the bit number [1] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) indicates that a random value has been taken into the RS1 hard latch random value register (RS1HV). In the example shown in FIG. 42B, when the random value is not captured, the bit value of the data RS1HF becomes “0”, but when the random value has been captured, the bit value is “0”. 1 ”. The data RS1HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  The data RS0HF set in the bit number [0] of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF) indicates that the random value is taken into the RS0 hard latch random value register (RS0HV). In the example shown in FIG. 42B, the bit value of the data RS0HF is “0” when the random value is not captured, and the bit value is “1” when the random value has been captured. "become. The data RS0HF is set to “0” as an initial value.

  FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RL0 hard latch random number value register m (RL0mHV). FIG. 43B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL0 hard latch random number value register m (RL0mHV). In FIG. 43, m takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 43B, the data RL0mHV15 to RL0mHV0 set in the bit number [15-0] of the RL0 hard latch random number value register m (RL0mHV) is the 16-bit random number RL0 captured by the external terminal input. Value is set. When a random value is taken in, “1” is set to the corresponding bit of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0).

  FIG. 44A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RL1 hard latch random number value register m (RL1mHV). FIG. 44B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL1 hard latch random number value register m (RL1mHV). In FIG. 44, m takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 44 (B), the data RL1mHV15 to RL1mHV0 set in the bit number [15-0] of the RL1 hard latch random number value register m (RL1mHV) is the 16-bit random number RL1 captured by the external terminal input. Value is set. When a random value is taken in, “1” is set to the corresponding bit of the RL hard latch flag register 0 (RLHF0).

  FIG. 45A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the RL2 hard latch random number value register m (RL2mHV). FIG. 45B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL2 hard latch random number value register m (RL2mHV). In FIG. 45, m takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 45 (B), the data RL2mHV15 to RL2mHV0 set in the bit number [15-0] of the RL2 hard latch random number register m (RL2mHV) is the 16-bit random number RL2 fetched by the external terminal input. Value is set. When a random value is fetched, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1).

  FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RL3 hard latch random number value register m (RL3mHV). FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RL3 hard latch random number value register m (RL3mHV). In FIG. 46, m takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 46 (B), the data RL3mHV15 to RL3mHV0 set in the bit number [15-0] of the RL3 hard latch random number register m (RL3mHV) is the 16-bit random number RL3 fetched by the external terminal input. Value is set. When a random value is fetched, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the RL hard latch flag register 1 (RLHF1).

  FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an RSn hard latch random number value register (RSnHV). FIG. 47B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the RSn hard latch random number value register (RSnHV). In FIG. 47, n takes a value from 0 to 3. As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the data RSnHV7 to RSnHV0 set in the bit number [7-0] of the RSn hard latch random number value register (RLnHV) are the values of the 8-bit random number RSn fetched by the external terminal input. Is set. Further, when a random value is fetched, “1” is set to the corresponding bit of the RS hard latch flag register (RSHF).

  FIG. 48A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the WDT start register (WST). FIG. 48B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting contents in each bit of data set in the WDT start register (WST). As shown in FIG. 14, when “1” is set to the bit number [6] of the reset setting (KRES), it becomes possible to start the WTD 506b by software, but such a setting has been made. When the WDT activation control code is set in the WDT start register (WST) by software (specifically, by the CPU 56 operating according to the software), the WDT 506b is activated. Further, when the STD 506B is operating in a state where such settings are made, the WTD 506b can be stopped by software.

  Specifically, for example, when “CC (H)” is set in the bit number [7-0] of WST, WDT 506b is activated, and when “33 (H)” is set, WDT 506b is stopped.

  If “AA (H)” is set after “55 (H)” is set in the WDT clear register (WCL) shown in FIG. 9, the WTD 506 b restarts. That is, the count operation is restarted.

  The timer circuit 509 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 is an 8-bit programmable timer, and the game control microcomputer 560 includes three channels of 8-bit counters as the timer circuit 509. In this embodiment, the timer circuit 509 can be used to perform a real-time interrupt request and time measurement by setting by a user program.

  The interrupt controller 510 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 includes an external interrupt request from the PI5 / XINT terminal and built-in peripheral circuits (for example, serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509). This is a circuit for controlling an interrupt request from.

  A parallel input port 511 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 incorporates an input-only port (PIP) having an 8-bit width. Further, the parallel output port 513 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 incorporates an output-only port (POP) having an 11-bit width.

  The serial communication circuit 512 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in the input / output with respect to the outside. The game control microcomputer 560 includes, as the serial communication circuit 512, a 1-channel circuit for both transmission and reception and a 3-channel circuit for transmission only. For example, the circuit for both transmission and reception is used for communication between the game control microcomputer 560 that requires two-way communication and the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37, for example. For example, the circuit for transmission only is used for communication from the game control microcomputer 560, which may be one-way communication, to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  An address decode circuit 514 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 decodes each functional block in the game control microcomputer 560 and a chip select signal which is a decode signal for an external device. Circuit. An internal circuit or peripheral device of the game control microcomputer 560 is selected (accessed) by the chip select signal.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, whether a user reset or a system reset is generated when a time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated. It is possible (see FIG. 14). FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a difference in the reset operation depending on the setting content in the reset setting (KRES).

  First, a case where a system reset is set to occur when a time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, when power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 initializes all internal circuits including the CPU core, and program management area In accordance with the set contents, various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 such as setting of the internal reset operation and setting of the random number circuits 508a and 508b are performed by hardware (step S1001). Specifically, the internal reset operation is set according to the setting contents of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 14 of the program management area, or the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (FIG. 15 to FIG. 19) shown in FIG. The random number circuits 508a and 508b are set according to the setting contents of KRL1) to 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2). In the example shown in FIG. 49A, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the system reset as the internal reset operation setting according to the setting contents of the program management area. The setting contents of the program management area are set in advance by a gaming machine manufacturer (user) at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine.

  When various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 are completed, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to a security mode and executes a security check (step S1002). In the security check executed in step S1002, the user program is authenticated. Specifically, it is calculated whether or not the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the process proceeds to step S1003. If the authentication code is not correct, the CPU 56 is stopped.

  The security mode time to be shifted to the security mode is determined according to the setting contents of the security time setting (KSES) shown in FIG. Specifically, the security mode time is set by setting in step S1001 according to the setting contents of the security time setting (KSES) shown in FIG. 20 of the program management area. Note that the authentication code is written together with the user program by a gaming machine manufacturer (user) at the time of writing into the built-in ROM 54 when the gaming machine is manufactured, for example.

  When the security check is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the user mode and starts executing the user program. Specifically, the CPU 56 starts executing the main process shown in FIG.

  Next, when the user program is being executed (specifically, during the execution of the loop process in the main process shown in FIG. 51 or the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 52), the watch dog timer (WDT) 506b. A case where a time-out signal from the IAT and an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a are generated will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 49A, system reset is set as the internal reset operation setting in step S1001. Therefore, a system reset occurs based on the occurrence of a timeout signal or an IAT signal.

  Similar to the processing in step S1001, the game control microcomputer 560 initializes all internal circuits including the CPU core, and sets the internal reset operation and the random number circuits 508a and 508b according to the setting contents of the program management area. Various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 such as settings are performed by hardware (step S1005). When various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 are completed, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the security mode and executes a security check (step S1006), as in step S1002.

  When the security check is completed, as in the case of step S1003, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the user mode and starts executing the user program.

  Thereafter, each time a time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated, the operations in steps S1004 to S1007 are executed. In FIG. 49A, the specific processing contents of steps S1001 and S1002 and the specific processing contents of steps S1005 and S1006 are the same.

  Next, a case where a user reset is set to occur when a time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (B), when power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 initializes all the internal circuits including the CPU core, and program Various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 such as the setting of the internal reset operation and the setting of the random number circuits 508a and 508b are performed in hardware according to the setting contents of the management area (step S1011). Specifically, the internal reset operation is set according to the setting contents of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 14 of the program management area, or the 16-bit random number initial setting 1 (FIG. 15 to FIG. 19) shown in FIG. The random number circuits 508a and 508b are set according to the setting contents of KRL1) to 8-bit random number initial setting 2 (KRS2). In the example shown in FIG. 49B, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the user reset as the internal reset operation setting according to the setting contents of the program management area. The setting contents of the program management area are set in advance by a gaming machine manufacturer (user) at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine.

  When various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 are completed, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to a security mode and executes a security check (step S1012). In the security check executed in step S1012, the user program is authenticated. Specifically, it is recalculated whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the process proceeds to step S1013. If the authentication code is not correct, the CPU 56 is stopped. The security mode time for shifting to the security mode is variable according to the setting contents of the security time setting (KSES) shown in FIG. 20 of the program management area as already described. Specifically, the security mode time is set by performing the setting in step S1011 according to the setting contents of the security time setting (KSES) shown in FIG. 20 of the program management area. The authentication code is written in advance together with the user program by the gaming machine manufacturer (user) when writing into the built-in ROM 54 when the gaming machine is manufactured.

  When the security check is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the user mode and starts executing the user program. Specifically, execution of the main process shown in FIG. 51 is started.

  Next, when the user program is being executed (specifically, during the execution of the loop process in the main process shown in FIG. 51 or the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 52), the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b A case where a time-out signal and an IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a are generated will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 49B, the user reset is generated based on the generation of the time-out signal or the IAT signal because the user reset is set as the setting of the internal reset operation in step S1011.

  When a user reset occurs, the various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 in step S1011 and the security check in step S1012 are not executed. Of the internal circuits of the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU core and timer circuit 509 The free-run counter circuit 507, the arithmetic circuit 505, the parallel input port 511, the parallel output port 513, the serial communication circuit 512, the interrupt controller 510, and the like are initialized. Then, returning to the top address of the user program, the execution of the user program is started again from the top address (step S1015). Specifically, the execution of the main process shown in FIG. 51 is started again.

  Thereafter, each time the time-out signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b or the IAT signal from the IAT circuit 506a is generated, the operations in steps S1014 to S1015 are executed.

  In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 reads the data stored in the internal RAM area during execution of the user program, all the upper and lower levels of the internal RAM area in which the data is stored are read. It is possible to read out data by designating only the lower order of the address instead of designating the address of the address. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how to read data stored in the internal RAM area. In this embodiment, data referred to by the user program is stored in the F000H to F0FFH areas in the built-in RAM area, and the upper address of the data storage area is F0H. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a dedicated register (Q register) for setting the upper address of the data storage area as a fixed value, and a fixed value F0H is set in the Q register.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, the case where the data stored in the address F020H of the internal RAM area is read is shown. The CPU 56 performs a data read operation by designating only the lower address 20H using a command LDQ for reading data using the Q register (specifically, executing LDQ A, (20H)). . Then, the CPU 56 specifies the upper address of the data storage area as F0H from the fixed value set in the Q register, specifies the lower address 20H specified by the LDQ instruction, and combines the upper and lower data storage areas. Is specified as F020H. Then, the CPU 56 reads out the data a stored in the data storage area corresponding to the specified F020H and stores it in the register A.

  Note that the value of the Q register is initialized by hardware when the system is reset, and is automatically set to the initial value F0H. For example, when power is supplied to a gaming machine and power supply is started, the lower 4 bits of the Q register are initialized to 0, and the upper 4 bits are inverted by an inverting circuit to become all values 1. F0H is automatically set as the initial value of the Q register. Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, even when the execution of the user program is started, a process for setting the initial value F0H in the Q register is executed by the user program (see step S5A in FIG. 51). .

  Further, the initial value of the Q register may be set by a hardware automatic setting that is performed when power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, or is executed when the user program starts. It may be set by a user program.

  Next, a process that is executed according to the user program after the system check is executed and the mode is changed to the user mode will be described. When the mode is shifted to the user mode, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) starts executing the main process.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings. In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (such as initialization of the timer circuit 509, the parallel input port 511, and the parallel output port 513, which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)), the RAM is made accessible. Set (step S5). In the process of step S4, the CPU 56 also performs settings for permitting or prohibiting the operation of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. Specifically, “1” or “0” is set to bit [6] of the reset setting (KRES).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets an initial value F0H in the Q register (step S5A). That is, the initial value F0H is set in the Q register at the timing when the process of step S5 is executed and the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch 921 input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S14 and step S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, data protection processing for the backup RAM area (backup area) (for example, processing for stopping power supply such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is confirmed whether or not (step S7). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the backup flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (in this embodiment, a backup flag area that is 1 byte in the backup area). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup flag area is a predetermined value as a backup flag (backup flag value: 55 (H) in this embodiment). The backup flag value is set in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup area. In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. That is, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage such as an unexpected power outage, the data in the backup area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  When the check result is normal (step S8), the CPU 56 determines the internal state of the game control means (game control microcomputer 560) and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means when the power supply is stopped. A game state restoration process (steps S41 to S45) for returning to the state is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a specific value (AA (H) in this embodiment) in the backup flag area of the RAM 55 (step S43).

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (probability big hit, normal big hit, sudden probability big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S45). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup area is stored. However, only the backup flag is used as an opportunity to execute the gaming state recovery process. May be.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a specific value (AA (H) in this embodiment) in the backup flag area of the RAM 55 (step S13).

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S14). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the timer circuit 509 built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to do. Game control process for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 560 is a process for controlling a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. Or a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the value that can be taken by the random number for determination per normal symbol) When the number of steps between the minimum value and the maximum value is increased), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S21 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 connects the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a via the input driver circuit 58. The detection signals are input, and their state is determined (switch process: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 outputs information (data) relating to the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer as information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an information output circuit. The information output processing to be output from is performed (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a. Processing is executed (step S30). Specifically, in response to winning detection based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a and the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on, A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. When the speed is such, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “X”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Eventually, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  The small hit is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 seconds is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  53 and 54 are flowcharts showing an example of the voltage drop time process in step S20. The power supply monitoring circuit 920 shown in FIG. 4 outputs a power-off signal when a predetermined voltage (for example, + 24V) used in the gaming machine becomes a predetermined value (for example, + 5V) or less. Specifically, The power-off signal is turned on (low level), but the power-off signal is input to the NMI terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 generates an NMI when the power-off signal changes from the off state (high level) to the on state. When NMI occurs, the game control microcomputer 560 starts NMI processing. That is, the process is executed according to the voltage drop processing program set from the address in the program area determined as the execution start address when the NMI occurs.

  In the voltage drop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the data set in the backup flag area of the RAM 55 is a specific value (AA (H) in this embodiment) (step S450). If the data set in the backup flag area is not a specific value, 00 (H) is set in the backup flag area (step S451), an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (step S452), and a loop is performed. Enter processing (transition to infinite loop). That is, no processing is executed. Thereafter, access to the RAM 55 is impossible.

  Next, when power supply is started, the CPU 56 executes the gaming state recovery process (steps S41 to S45) on the condition that a predetermined value (55 (H)) is stored in the backup flag area. Therefore, when the process of step S451 is executed, the gaming state recovery process is not executed. That is, when the power supply voltage decreases and the power supply stop process is executed, if the data in the backup flag area is not a specific value, the game state restoration process is executed when the power supply is started next time. Initialization processing is executed first. Note that the value set in the backup flag area in the process of step S451 does not have to match the specific value (AA (H)), and thus does not have to be 00 (H).

  If the data set in the backup flag area is a specific value, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined value (55 (H)) in the backup flag area of the RAM 55 (step S453), and stores the stored contents of the RAM 55. The power supply stop process for saving is executed.

  In the power supply stop process, the CPU 56 creates parity data (steps S454 to S463). That is, first, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (step S454), and the checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area in which the contents are to be stored even when power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (Step S455). Further, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (step S456).

  Next, an exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (step S457). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (step S458), the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S459), and the value of the checksum calculation count is decremented by 1 (step S460). Then, the processes in steps S457 to S460 are repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (step S461).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area (step S462). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (step S463). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (step S471). Thereafter, the built-in RAM 55 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S472). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the head address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the output ports for the number of processes are sequentially set.

  The CPU 56 loads data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the number of processes) (step S473). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S474), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the address of the output port) is loaded (step S475). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S476), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (step S477). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (step S478). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S479), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S474.

  When the number of processes is 0, that is, when all output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (step S481). Note that the process of clearing the output port may be executed before the process of creating checksum data. For example, the CPU 56 may execute the output port clear processing in steps S472 to S480 immediately after determining Y in step S453.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs setting for starting the WDT 506b (step S482). That is, CC (H) is set in the WDT start register (WST) and the WDT 506b is activated. The CPU 56 sets “1” in advance to the bit number [6] (see FIG. 14) of the reset setting (KRES), and sets the WDT 506b so that it can be activated by software. For example, in the initial setting process (corresponding to the process of step S4), “1” is set to the bit number [6] of the reset setting (KRES).

  The CPU 56 sets “11” to the bit number [5-4] of the reset setting (KRES) and sets “1111” to the bit number [3-0] in the initial setting process, for example. That is, the timeout time corresponding to the monitoring time counted by the WDT 506b is set to the longest time that can be set as the monitoring time. However, such a setting method is an example.

  Thereafter, after setting an access prohibition value in the RAM access register (step S483), the CPU 56 enters a loop process. When performing the loop processing, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 turns on the reset signal in response to the drop of VCC to the first predetermined value. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is stopped.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above processing, the power supply stop processing in steps S453 to S481 is executed, and the specific value (AA (H)) indicating that the power supply stop processing is executed is backed up. Stored in the flag area, the RAM access is prohibited, the output port is cleared, and the timer interrupt for executing the game control process is set to the prohibited state.

  The power supply stop process is executed based on a decrease in the value of the predetermined voltage, but may be recovered after the voltage has decreased once (so-called instantaneous power failure). When such a situation occurs, the CPU 56 continues the loop process.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the WDT 506b is activated by software in the process of step S482, and the game control microcomputer 560 is reset based on the timeout of the WDT 506b (see bit number [7] in FIG. 14). Therefore, when the voltage is restored, the game control microcomputer 560 can resume the game control operation.

  Although not shown in FIG. 52, when the process of step S452 is executed, the same process as the process of step S483 is performed.

  Further, without using the WDT 506b, the game control microcomputer 560 may be able to resume the game control operation when the voltage is restored after the voltage has once decreased. For example, the power-off signal is input to the NMI terminal and input to the input port. Then, after executing the processing of steps S452 and S483, the CPU 56 continues to monitor the state of the power-off signal input to the input port. When the power-off signal returns to the high level (when the power-off signal is turned off), the CPU 56 resumes the processing that was being performed when the NMI occurred (when the NMI occurred) Returns to the process that was being executed). Note that the CPU 56 may start control from the process of step S1.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 55 is backed up by a backup power source (the contents of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). In this example, the checksum based on the contents of the RAM 55 when the power-off signal is output is stored in the backup area of the RAM 55 together with the backup flag value by the processing in steps S453 to S463. After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, when the power supply is restored within a predetermined period, the game control means performs the data stored in the RAM 55 (immediately before the power supply is stopped) by the processing of steps S41 to S44 described above. In accordance with the data indicating the game state that is the control state by the game control means (for example, including the process flag state, the big hit flag state, the probability change flag state, the output port output state, etc.) It is possible to return to the state immediately before the supply is stopped. If the power supply stop period exceeds the predetermined period, the backup flag value and the checksum should be different from the regular values. In this case, the initialization process of steps S10 to S15 is executed.

  In addition, when the power-off signal is turned off after executing the process of step S483, the game control returns to step S1. (When WTD506b is used, the power-off signal is also introduced into the input port. (If the process is executed from step S1 because the power-off signal has returned to the off state). In this case, since data indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set, the recovery process of steps S41 to S45 is executed. Therefore, when the power-off signal is turned off after executing the power supply stop process, the process returns to the state of controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, even if a power interruption or the like occurs, the game control process does not stop, and the game control process is automatically continued. Note that the loop process may be continued even when the power-off signal is turned off without using the WTD 506b or the like (without executing the process in step S482 or the like). In this case, the game control returns to step S1 by turning on the power switch 914 (see FIG. 4) after turning it off.

  In this embodiment, the power supply stop process is executed on the condition that the value of the data in the backup flag area is a specific value (AA (H)). The specific value is set in the backup flag area when power supply is started (see FIG. 50), but may be set at another timing. For example, the CPU 56 sets a specific value in the backup flag area after executing the process of step S15 shown in FIG. 51 or at an arbitrary timing in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. When setting a specific value in the timer interrupt process, the specific value may be set only once after the power is turned on, but the specific value may always be set (every 4 ms).

  When power supply stops (when the voltage drops), there is a possibility that the signal input from the hardware circuit to the game control microcomputer 560 is unstable. For example, NMI may occur several times before the power is actually turned off. In addition, the contents of the RAM 55 may change due to the voltage drop. When the power supply stop process is started, a specific value should be stored in the backup flag area, but when the voltage drops, the value may change. The fact that the specific value is not stored in the backup flag area means that the contents of the RAM 55 cannot be saved correctly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the data value in the backup flag area is not the specific value (AA (H)), a process for saving the contents of the RAM 55 (setting of the backup flag value (55 (H)) is performed. Etc.) to prevent the game control recovery process from being executed based on uncertain data when power supply is next started.

  In this embodiment, the power-off signal is input to the NMI terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. However, when the power-down signal is input to the maskable interrupt terminal and the maskable interrupt process is performed, the voltage drop process is performed. Even if it is configured to execute the above-mentioned concept (set the specified value on the condition that the specific value is stored, execute the power supply stop process, and set the specific value in the initialization process) Can be applied).

  Also, check the power-off signal status by introducing a power-off signal to the input port and checking the input status of the input port at any time without using interrupts (for example, by checking with 4ms timer interrupt processing). However, if the input of the power-off signal is detected, the above-described concept can be applied even in the case where the process is performed when the voltage drops.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing software random numbers used in this embodiment. Each software random number is used as follows. As described above, in this embodiment, a hardware random number output from the 16-bit random number circuit 508b is used for the big hit determination random number (random R) for determining whether or not to win. (1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot) (for jackpot type determination) (2) Random 2 (MR2): determines type (type) of variation pattern (3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (For fluctuation pattern determination) (4) Random 4 (MR4): Whether to generate a hit based on the normal symbol Decide whether or not (for normal symbol per determination) (5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value)
In this embodiment, hardware random numbers extracted from the random number circuit are used only for the jackpot determination random number (random R), and software random numbers are used for the other random numbers. In addition to the random number (random R), hardware random numbers extracted from the random number circuit may be used for all of random numbers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. In addition, hardware random numbers extracted from the random number circuit may be used for only some of the random numbers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 55, and software random numbers may be used for the rest.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type is first determined using the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3). Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns. That is, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type corresponds to a group in which a plurality of variation patterns are grouped according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In step S23 of the game control process shown in FIG. 52, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. For example, an initial value determining random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot type determining random number (random 1) may be provided. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 56A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 56 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 56 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 56 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

  56 (B) and 56 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 56 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) is set in FIG. 56 (C). Each numerical value listed is set. Also, the numerical values described in FIGS. 56B and 56C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In that case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 56 (C) may not be provided. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit is generated, and if the stage is configured to perform an effect asking whether or not to shift to the probability change state, the current game state is also the probability change state. Regardless, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches one of the big hit determination values shown in (1), it is decided to make a big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) for the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 56B and 56C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 56 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probability” shown in FIGS. 56B and 56C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56B and 56C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  56D and 56E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 56 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the first special symbol is changed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 56 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56D and 56E, 10 determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 3 is assigned to the jackpot type determination table 131b for “sudden probability change big hit” (a ratio of 3/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (D) and 56 (E), the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given is determined for two rounds of sudden probability variation, and the gaming value is determined. As a second specific gaming state to which a larger amount of game value is given, a big round of 15 rounds (probable big hit or normal big hit) is determined and the first special symbol is displayed at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Although it is determined to be in the specific gaming state, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56D and 56E, the types of big hits include “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, and “suddenly probable big hit”.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished. .) After shifting to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  Further, the “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and is not shifted to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is ended, and is shifted only to the time-short state. Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state is maintained until the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this embodiment, after the transition to the time reduction state, the time reduction state also ends when a big hit occurs before the execution of the predetermined number of variable displays is completed.

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. Then, after the end of the two-round big hit gaming state, the state is shifted to the probability changing state (in this embodiment, the state is shifted to the probability changing state and also to the time reduction state). After shifting to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, even when “small hit” is reached, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the two big winning openings ends, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “suddenly probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  57 and 58 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter. In addition, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, the lottery process using the big hit determination random number (random R) is executed to display the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Decide whether or not to win. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 59), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the set contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that the small hit pre-release process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the small hit pre-release process is a process for starting the small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 59 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold port number). Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S201A).

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S202A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S203A).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts a value from each counter for generating software random numbers (a jackpot type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3)). (Step S204A). Further, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data as a big hit determination random number (random R) from the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) used by the channel 0 16-bit random number circuit 508b (step S205A).

  As already described with reference to FIG. 25, the RL0 hard latch random value register based on the signal (latch signal) from any terminal depending on the setting contents of bits 2-0 of the RL0 hard latch selection register 0 (RL0LS0). Whether to latch the random value to 0 (RL0HV0) is set. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the detection signal from the first start port switch 13a is inputted as a latch signal to the set terminal, and the start winning to the first start winning port 13 has occurred. The random number value can be latched in the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) at the timing.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes processing for storing the extracted software random numbers and jackpot determination random number (random R) in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 60) (step S206A). Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 60, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number addition designation command designating that the first reserved memory number has increased by 1 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S207A).

  If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit (Y in step S201A), the CPU 56 extracts numerical data from the RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) (step S208A), and the extracted numerical data (random number) ) Is not stored, and the first start port switch passing process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, bit 3 of RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0) in the program management area shown in FIG. 25 is set to “0”, and a value is read from RL0 hard latch random number register 0 (RL0HV0). Otherwise, it is set so that the next value cannot be latched. Therefore, even when the first reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value, the CPU 56 performs only the process of extracting numerical data from the RL0 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL0HV0) (until the value is stored). RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0) can latch the next value.

  Note that bit 3 of RL0 hard latch select register 0 (RL0LS0) is set to “1” and the next value can be latched without reading the value from RL0 hard latch random value register 0 (RL0HV0). Also good. In such a case, the process of step S208A is not necessary.

  Next, the second start port switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the stored number is 4) (step S201B).

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S202B), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S203B).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts a value from each counter for generating a software random number (a jackpot type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3)). (Step S204B). Further, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data as a big hit determination random number (random R) from the RL1 hard latch random value register 0 (RL1HV0) used by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b of the channel 1 (step S205B).

  As already described with reference to FIG. 27, the RL1 hard latch random value register 0 based on the signal (latch signal) from any terminal depending on the setting contents of bits 2-0 of the RL1 hard latch selection register (RL1LS). Whether or not to latch the random value in (RL1HV0) is set. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a is input as a latch signal to the set terminal, and the start winning to the second start winning port 14 occurs. The random number value can be latched in the RL1 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL1HV0) at the timing.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a process of storing those extracted software random numbers and jackpot determination random numbers (random R) in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 60) (step S206B). Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number addition designation command designating that the second reserved memory number has increased by 1 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S207B).

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (Y in step S201B), the CPU 56 extracts numerical data from the RL1 hard latch random value register 0 (RL1HV0) (step S208B), and the extracted numerical data (random number) ) Is not stored, and the second start port switch passing process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, bit 3 of the RL1 hard latch selection register (RL1LS) in the program management area is set to “0” (corresponding to the case where n = 1 in FIG. 27), and the RL1 hard latch random value It is set so that the next value cannot be latched unless a value is read from register 0 (RL1HV0). Therefore, even when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value, the CPU 56 performs only the process of extracting numerical data from the RL1 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL1HV0) (until the value is stored). RL1 hard latch random value register 0 (RL1HV0) can latch the next value.

  Note that bit 3 of RL1 hard latch select register 0 (RL1LS) is set to “1” and the next value can be latched without reading the value from RL1 hard latch random value register 0 (RL1HV0). Also good. In such a case, the process of step S208B is unnecessary.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S205A and S205B, the random value register that is different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. A random number value is extracted from and stored. By doing so, for example, changing the start value of the random number update, changing the setting of changing the random number sequence, or changing the setting of the random number maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The random number value can be made difficult to synchronize between the case where it is performed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and it is difficult to perform an act such as illegally generating a big hit aiming at a predetermined random number update timing. .

  In this embodiment, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by extracting the random number value from different channels (channel 0 and channel 1 in this example) of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b and the second case. The random number value register for extracting the random number is different depending on the case where the special symbol variation display is executed. For example, even in the same channel of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b, from different hard latch random number value registers used in the same channel (for example, RL0 hard latch random number value register 0 (RL0HV0) and RL0 hard latch random number value of the same channel 0) By extracting the random number value (from register 1 (RL0HV1)), the random number value register for extracting random numbers is different between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. It may be allowed.

  In this embodiment, the random value is extracted from the hard latch random value register. However, for example, the random value may be extracted from the soft latch random value register. When extracting a random value, the first special symbol is extracted by extracting a random value from a different channel of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b or by extracting a random value from a different soft latch random value register even in the same channel. The random number value register for extracting random numbers may be made different between the case where the variable display is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  In this embodiment, the random number value is extracted from the 16-bit random number circuit 508b. However, for example, the random value may be extracted from the 8-bit random number circuit 508a. When extracting random values, extracting random values from different channels of the 8-bit random number circuit 508a, or extracting random values from different hard latch random value registers or soft latch random value registers even in the same channel Thus, the random number value register for extracting random numbers may be different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  In this embodiment, as already described, in the game control microcomputer 560, the processing of steps S1001 and S1011 is executed by the hardware circuit when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, and settings relating to the random number circuits 508a and 508b are performed. After that, during the execution of the user program, the random number extraction process of steps S205A and S205B is executed in the first start port switch passing process (see step S312) and the second start port switch passing process (see step S314). Is done. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting relating to monitoring of the random number circuit is performed before the timing of extracting the numerical data (random number value) from the random number circuit.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (step S7001). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S7002). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S7003) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S7004).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S7005). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S7006). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number (step S7007). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7002.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (in this example, the input of an IAT signal from the IAT 506a and the input of a timeout signal from the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b). It is possible to set whether to generate a reset (for example, a system reset) or a second reset (for example, a user reset) (see bit 7 of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 14). Then, a security check is executed after the occurrence of the first reset, and no security check is executed after the occurrence of the second reset. Therefore, the type of reset to be performed when a predetermined event occurs according to the situation of the gaming machine or game store can be set to an optimum one, so that the security related to the game control microcomputer 560 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the occurrence of the predetermined event includes a case where an IAT signal is input from the IAT 506a and a case where a time-out signal is input from the watch dog timer (WDT) 506b. 560 may be reset based on the occurrence of a certain event such as an error that should be reset.

  In this embodiment, the occurrence of the predetermined event includes a timeout of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b, and whether or not to start the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b can be set by software (for example, , “0000” is set in bits 3-0 of the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. Even if the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b is set not to be activated, it is possible to set whether to generate the first reset or the second reset based on the occurrence of the predetermined event. . Specifically, in the reset setting (KRES) shown in FIG. 14, even if “0000” is set in bits 3-0, the type of reset can be set by setting bit 7. Therefore, regardless of the setting of the watchdog timer (WDT) 506b, the setting of the type of reset that is generated based on the occurrence of a predetermined event can be made common.

  In this embodiment, the occurrence of the predetermined event includes execution outside the designated area (for example, prohibition of running outside the designated area (IAT)) for executing a program stored in an area other than the designated area. The game control microcomputer 560 is executing a timer interrupt process (timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 52) executed in response to a timer interrupt generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) as a predetermined process. When execution outside the designated area occurs (in this example, an IAT signal is input from the IAT circuit 506a), the storage contents of the RAM 55 (backup RAM) are initialized (for example, after reset, step S10 shown in FIG. 51). Therefore, security can be improved when an unintended program is executed.

  In this embodiment, when it is set to generate the first reset, after the predetermined event occurs and the first reset is generated, the first reset is generated based on the occurrence of the predetermined event. Or whether to generate the second reset. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49A, when a system reset occurs, step S1005 is executed, and various settings of the game control microcomputer 560 are executed again in hardware. The system reset or the user reset is set again. Therefore, it is possible to reliably recover from an abnormal state to a normal state.

  In this embodiment, specifically, after a predetermined event occurs (input of IAT signal from IAT 506a, input of timeout signal from watchdog timer (WDT) 506b) and system reset occurs, The reset setting is set again (see step S1005 in FIG. 49A), but when a user reset occurs, the same processing as in step S1005 is executed to set the internal reset setting again. Also good.

  Further, in this embodiment, a random number clock signal (for example, for updating numerical data held by the numerical value holding means (in this example, a hard latch random value register or a soft latch random value register) of the 16-bit random number circuit 508b is used. , An external clock signal) is provided with random number circuit monitoring means (for example, update monitoring circuit 537) capable of monitoring the occurrence of frequency abnormality and the update state of numerical data held by the numerical value holding means. Therefore, since the occurrence of abnormality in the frequency of the random number clock signal can be monitored and the update state of the numerical data can be monitored, the security of the random number circuit (for example, the 16-bit random number circuit 508b) installed in the gaming machine can be improved. it can.

  In this embodiment, the control CPU (CPU 56 in this embodiment) mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 includes the first information (in this example, the upper address of the data storage area) and the second information. Based on (in this example, the lower address of the data storage area), the address corresponding to the area where the data to be read is stored is specified, and the data to be read is read from the area corresponding to the specified address. When reading the data to be read, the first information is specified based on a specific value (“F0H” stored as a fixed value in this embodiment) stored in the storage means (for example, Q register) In addition, the second information specified by the control instruction (in the example shown in FIG. 50, “20H” specified by the LDQ command (one of the programmed instructions)) is specified. Therefore, by using a storage means (for example, Q register), it is not necessary to specify a fixed part (higher address in this example) of the address of the data storage area with a command every time. It is possible to prevent waste (a waste of a program specifying a common part of an address) from occurring when executing an instruction.

  In this embodiment, the control CPU (CPU 56) is provided in the RAM 55 at a timing when access to the RAM 55 is permitted after power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S5 in FIG. 51). A value (F0H in this example) indicating a part of the address corresponding to the given work area is stored as a specific value in the storage means (Q register in this example) (see step S5A in FIG. 51).

  In this embodiment, as a method of storing a specific value, (1) a process of storing a specific value in the storage means at a timing when access to the RAM 55 is permitted, and (2) a specific value always stored in the storage means. There is a configuration in which values are stored. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the execution of the user program is started and the main process shown in FIG. 51 is started, a process for setting the initial value F0H in the Q register is executed by the user program (step At the same time as the system reset, the Q register n value is automatically set to the initial value F0H. For example, when power is supplied to a gaming machine and power supply is started, the lower 4 bits of the Q register are initialized to 0, and the upper 4 bits are inverted by an inverting circuit to all values 1. As a result, F0H is automatically set as the initial value of the Q register. However, the initial value of the Q register may be set by a user program executed at the start of the user program, but is automatically set by a hardware circuit when power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started. May be.

  In this embodiment, a command that can be used as a control instruction in the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the gaming machine includes a register data according to a predetermined rule and an address specified by another 2-byte register. There are an RLD command and an RRD command (both are one of programmed instructions) that can be exchanged with data stored (stored). For example, if the RLD command is used to replace the data in register A with the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register, the upper 4 bits of data in register A remain unchanged. The lower 4 bits of data in A are transferred to the lower 4 bits of the address specified by the 2-byte register, and the lower 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register are stored in the 2-byte register. It is possible to move to the upper 4 bits of the address designated by the upper 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address designated by the 2-byte register to the lower 4 bits of the register A. In this case, for example, if data in a non-writable area (for example, data in the ROM area) is specified as data stored (stored) at an address specified by a 2-byte register, it is specified by a 2-byte register. Only the operation of reflecting the upper 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register in the lower 4 bits of the register A, leaving the data stored (stored) at the specified address as it is. It can also be made.

  For example, when the data of the register A and the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register are exchanged using the RRD command, the upper 4 bits of the data of the register A are not changed. The lower 4 bits of data in register A are transferred to the upper 4 bits of the address specified by the 2-byte register, and the upper 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register are 2 bytes. It is possible to move to the lower 4 bits of the address designated by the register, and to move the lower 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address designated by the 2-byte register to the lower 4 bits of the register A. In this case, for example, if data in a non-writable area (for example, data in the ROM area) is specified as data stored (stored) at an address specified by a 2-byte register, it is specified by a 2-byte register. Only the operation of reflecting the lower 4 bits of the data stored (stored) at the address specified by the 2-byte register in the lower 4 bits of the register A while leaving the data stored (stored) at the specified address as it is Can also be executed.

  In addition, the gaming machine may be configured to execute a pre-reading notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. When configured to execute the pre-reading notice effect, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 has the first start opening at the timing when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 occurs. In the switch passage process (see step S312) and the second start port switch passage process (see step S314), a determination is made at the time of start winning, and control is performed to transmit a winning determination result command indicating the determination result. For example, as a determination result command at the time of winning a prize, it is determined whether a jackpot or small win is determined, a symbol designation command indicating a determination result of a jackpot type, and a random number value for determining a variation pattern type A variation category command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) indicating whether the value falls within the range is transmitted. Therefore, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command, a second reserved memory) as commands at the time of a starting prize within one timer interrupt at the timing when a new starting prize occurs. Number addition designation command) is transmitted.

  Further, since the first reserved memory number addition designation command is a command that is transmitted when the first start winning prize opening 13 is won, the first start prize indicating that the first start winning prize opening 13 has been won in this sense. It is also a start opening prize designation command. Further, since the second reserved memory number addition designation command is a command that is transmitted when a start winning prize is given to the second start winning prize opening 14, in this sense, the second winning prize winning opening 14 indicating that the start winning prize has been indicated. It is also the 2 start entry prize designation command. Hereinafter, the first start opening prize designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the second start opening prize designation command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) are collectively referred to as a starting opening prize designation command.

Hereinafter, an operation in the case where the prefetch notice effect is configured to be executable will be described.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S7005) shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 62, the effect control CPU 101 executes a prefetching notice determination process for determining the presence or absence of the prefetching notice effect and the effect mode (step S161).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetch notice determination process (step S161) shown in FIG. In the prefetch notice determination process shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 101 first stores the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer for storing the start winning command transmitted based on the start winning determination result at the start winning. A check is made (step S701). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new received command that is at least one of the commands at the time of starting winning (step S702). For example, at least one of a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command, a second reserved memory number addition designation command) is newly added to the reception command buffer at the start winning prize Whether or not there is a received command can be determined by checking whether or not it is stored. If no command is newly received (step S702: No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the prefetch notice determination process.

  If it is determined in step S702 that there is a received command (step S702: Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step S703). For example, in the process of step S703, it may be determined that the prefetching notice effect is being executed when the prefetching notice execution flag indicating that the prefetching notice effect is being executed is on. The pre-reading notice execution flag is set to the on state when the prefetching notice effect is executed.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the already determined effect mode so that the process for executing the pre-reading notice effect is not performed. When the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the winning determination result that the variable display mode is determined to be “non-reach”, the winning determination result or reach that the variable display result is determined to be “hit” When a winning determination result indicating that the change pattern is determined to include a change pattern with a sign may be switched from the pre-reading notice effect being executed to the super reach or jackpot notice effect. Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be further executed regardless of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect that has already been executed.

  If it is determined in step S703 that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed (step S703: No), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice restriction that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is in effect. Is determined (step S704). If it is determined in step S704 that the pre-reading notice is not restricted (step S704: No), the production control CPU 101 checks the order and content of the received commands based on the occurrence of the start winning (step S706). Then, it is determined whether or not it has been normally received (step S707). In the process of step S707, for example, whether or not the received commands at the start winning prize are in order, whether or not all the received commands have been received without omission, and whether or not the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent. Confirmation is made and if any one of them is denied, it may be determined that the signal could not be normally received. In addition, it is not limited to what determines that abnormality has occurred when any one is denied. For example, it may be determined that abnormality has occurred when any two are denied. Further, when all are denied, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S707 that the reception has been successful (step S707: Yes), the effect control CPU 101 checks the previous variation category command stored in the start winning reception command buffer ( Step S708) Only the current reserved memory number (for example, the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) is “3” or “4”, and the variation category up to the previous time is out of reach. It is determined whether or not (step S709). That is, in this embodiment, when there are two or three pieces of pending data whose variable display result is “non-reach”, the continuous notice effect is executed using the pending data.

  Note that when the number of reserved memories is sufficient to execute the continuous notice effect (for example, when it is 2 or more), the continuous notice effect may be executed. For example, the number of reserved memories that can be notified of a series of effects other than the notice pattern in which the effect mode changes, such as the continuous notice effect (prefetch notice effect) of the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1 (see FIG. 64). In this case, a continuous notice effect may be executed. In the case of such control, it is possible to improve the overall execution frequency of the continuous notice effect.

  In addition, when performing the pre-reading notice effect other than the stop symbol notice, the effect control CPU 101 executes the continuous notice effect even if the variable display result includes hold data in which “non-reach” is included. You may make it do. In the case of such control, since a reach may occur during the execution of the continuous notice effect or a “big hit” may occur, an unexpected effect can be executed. When the continuous notice effect is executed when the variable display result includes the hold data that becomes “non-reach”, for example, in the variable display with reach, the production mode other than the stop symbol notice is continuous. The notice effect may be selected. In the case of such control, it is possible to execute the continuous notice effect regardless of the display result before the variable display that is the target of prefetching is executed.

  For example, the CPU 101 for effect control uses the number of data received in the process of step S708 up to one before the latest variable category command and stored in the start winning reception command buffer, and the variable category command. Read the specified variation category. Also, whether or not the number of data is “3” or “4” in the processing of step S 709 in the process of step S 708, or only the variation category command that specifies the variation category corresponding to the non-reach deviation. Determine.

  In the process of step S709, the production control CPU 101 has only the current pending storage number “3” or “4”, and the previous variation category is non-reachable. If it is determined (step S709: Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching notice effect and a prefetching notice pattern corresponding to the prefetching notice effect in the case of executing the prefetching notice effect (step S710). .

  As an example, the effect control CPU 101 selects a prefetch notice determination table prepared in advance as a use table for determining the presence or absence of a prefetch notice effect and a prefetch notice pattern in the process of step S710. In the pre-reading notice determination table, a numerical value (compared with a random number value for determining the pre-reading notice type according to the specification contents of the variable category command transmitted based on the occurrence of the start winning corresponding to the variable display to be noticed) ( If the decision value is assigned to the decision result of “do not execute (do not execute)” corresponding to the case where the prefetching notice effect is not executed, or a plurality of prefetching notice patterns when the prefetching notice effect is executed. Good. Thereafter, the CPU 101 for effect control extracts, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the pre-reading notice, and refers to the pre-reading notice determination table based on the numerical data, thereby determining the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the pre-reading notice. What is necessary is just to determine a pattern.

  In the process of step S710, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the prefetching notice pattern at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 64, for example. In the setting example shown in FIG. 64, the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the determination ratio of the prefetching notice pattern differ depending on the variation category.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, four types of SYP1-1, SYP1-2, SYP2-1, and SYP3-1 are provided as prefetch notice patterns. The pre-reading notice patterns SYP1-1 and SYP1-2 constitute a chance for a continuous effect predetermined in the effect display device 9 over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display that is the subject of the notice is executed. This is a prefetching notice pattern corresponding to a stop symbol notice in which the decorative symbol stops. In the stop symbol announcement based on the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1, any of the chance eyes CA1 to CA8 (chance eye A) shown in FIG. In the chance eye A, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same numbers, and only the right symbol is a combination of numbers shifted by one. Further, in the stop symbol advance based on the prefetching advance notice pattern SYP1-2, any of chance chances CB1 to CB6 (chance eye B) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 65 (B), the chance eyes B are a combination of numbers. In this embodiment, as will be described later, it is possible that a big hit will be given when the stop symbol advance notice that the chance eye B stops is executed, rather than when the stop symbol notice that the chance eye B stops is executed. The reliability (big hit reliability) is high. Since it is constituted in that way, when a stop symbol notice is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which chance eye has stopped, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The chance eye A and the chance eye B are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B, and may be a predetermined combination that can be distinguished from each other. For example, the chance eye A may be an arbitrary combination of even numbers that are normal symbols (non-probable variation symbols), and the chance eye B may be an arbitrary combination of odd numbers that are probability variation symbols. By doing in this way, it becomes easy for the player to recognize which chance is the chance.

  In the pre-reading notice pattern SYP2-1, the background image in the effect display device 9 changes from the normal background image to the special background image during the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the notice is executed, and the notice This is a look-ahead notice pattern corresponding to executing a background change notice in which the display of the special background image continues until the target variable display is executed.

  The prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 is a prefetching notice pattern corresponding to executing a prefetch notice effect that changes to a background change notice after the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is executed depending on whether the variation category is “non-reach out”, “out of reach”, “accuracy / small hit”, or “big hit”. The ratio and the determination ratio of the prefetch notice pattern are different.

  Specifically, when the variation category is “reach out of reach”, the proportion of the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than “executed”), compared to the case of “non-reach out”. When the fluctuation category is “big hit”, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than “non-reach out”, “reach out”, and “accuracy / small hit”. It has become. With such a setting, it is possible to notify and suggest that the variable display result will be a “big hit” or that the reach will be executed by executing the pre-reading notice effect. If the variation category is “Accuracy / Small Hit”, “Accuracy” or substantial In order to prevent the player from being discouraged by becoming a “small hit” in which the game state does not change in addition to not being able to get a ball (prize ball), the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed. Good.

  Further, in the determination ratio shown in FIG. 64, the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 in which the chance eye B stops is more than the case where the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 in which the chance eye A is stopped is executed. When the is executed, the rate at which the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit reliability) and the rate at which reach is executed (reach reliability) are higher. As described above, since the big hit reliability and the reach reliability differ depending on the type of the chance item, the player comes to pay attention to the stop symbol, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, when the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP2-1 of the background change notice is executed, compared to the case where the prefetching notice effect of the stop symbol notice such as the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 or the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 is executed. The higher the jackpot reliability and reach reliability.

  Further, the prefetching notice of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 that changes from the stop symbol notice to the background change notice than when the predesign notice effect of the stop symbol notice such as the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1 or the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-2 is executed. The jackpot reliability and reach reliability are higher when the performance is executed.

  In this way, even if the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice with low jackpot reliability or reach reliability is executed, it may change to a background change notice with high hit reliability or reach reliability, Even when the stop symbol notice is executed, the player expects to change to the background change notice, so that the player's expectation can be maintained and the interest of the game is improved.

  In particular, the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 is changed from the same effect form (effect form in which the chance eye A stops) to the background change notice as the prefetch notice pattern SYP1-1 having the lowest jackpot reliability and reach reliability. It is going to change. As a result, even when a pre-reading notice effect with the lowest jackpot reliability or reach reliability and when the chance eye A stops is executed, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In this embodiment, there is a case where the chance symbol A stops from the stop symbol notice to the background change notice, but the stop symbol notice that the chance item B stops does not change to the background change notice (the rate of change varies). 0%). However, there may be a case where the chance symbol B changes from a stop symbol notice to a background change notice. In that case, the ratio of change to the background change notice is different between when the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A stops is executed and when the stop symbol notice that the chance eye B stops is executed. That's fine. Specifically, it is possible to make the change from the stop symbol notice that the chance eye A with a low jackpot reliability or reach reliability when the background change notice does not change stop more easily to the background change notice. preferable. By doing in this way, even when a stop symbol notice with a low jackpot reliability or reach reliability is executed, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability are higher when the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 is executed than when the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP2-1 is executed. Yes. By such setting, the player is more expected to change to the background change notice, the player's sense of expectation can be further maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Note that when the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state, it may be limited not to execute the prefetch notice effect. Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state can be determined, for example, in accordance with whether or not the value of the effect process flag is “6” or “7”. Further, whether or not the game state is a small hit game state can be determined, for example, corresponding to whether or not the value of the effect process flag is “4” or “5”.

  Even when the gaming state is a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, the prefetch notice effect may be made executable. For example, after receiving a start winning command based on the occurrence of a start winning, when the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, “10”), it is stored in the start winning received command buffer. It is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect by reading the symbol designating command or the variable category command, and to execute the pre-reading notice effect during the round. In that case, as a pre-reading advance notice effect, for example, an effect of a one-notification notification mode for notifying that the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the end of the current big hit gaming state is executed. May be.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not “do not execute” the pre-reading notice effect is not executed based on the determination by the process of step S710 illustrated in FIG. 63 (step S711). If it is other than “not executed” (step S711: No), a setting for starting execution of the prefetching notice effect according to the determined prefetching notice pattern is performed (step S712). In step S712, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the reserved memory number (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) as the initial count value in the prefetch notice execution number counter indicating the number of variable displays for executing the prefetch notice effect. Then, for example, a setting corresponding to the fact that the prefetching notice effect is being executed, such as setting the prefetching notice execution flag to the on state, is performed. Further, the production control CPU 101 sets a prefetching notice effect control pattern corresponding to the prefetching notice pattern determined in the processing of step S710 and the current reserved memory number (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number). .

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of prefetch notice effect control patterns. As shown in FIG. 66, the prefetching notice effect control pattern SCP1-1 corresponding to the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) being 3, A prefetching notice effect control pattern SCP1-2 and a prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 corresponding to the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-1 and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) being four. The pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP2-1 and the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 corresponding to the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) being 3, and the reserved memory number (first The pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP2-2 and the pre-reading notice pattern SYP2-1 corresponding to the fact that the number of one hold memory and the second hold memory number is 4, and the number of hold memories (first The prefetching notice effect control pattern SCP3-1 and the prefetching notice pattern SYP2-1 corresponding to the fact that the retained memory number and the second reserved memory number are 3 are the reserved memory numbers (the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). The pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP3-2 and the pre-reading notice pattern SYP3-1 corresponding to the fact that the number of memories) is 4, and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) is 3. The prefetching notice effect control pattern SCP4-1 corresponding to the above and the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 and the number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) are four. A control pattern SCP4-2 is provided. As shown in FIG. 66, each prefetch notice effect control pattern includes control data corresponding to the effect contents to be executed in each variation after the start of the prefetch notice effect.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the case of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1, the background change notice is executed at the second change after the prefetching notice effect is started. However, the background change notice may be executed at the time of a change that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect or at the time of the change one time before the change that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. For example, when the pre-reading notice pattern SYP3-1 is determined, the timing for executing the background change notice may be further determined, and the pre-reading notice effect control pattern corresponding to the determination result may be selected. . In that case, the determination ratio of the timing for executing the background change notice may be varied in accordance with the display result (variation category) of the change that is the target of the prefetch notice effect. By controlling in such a manner, the big hit reliability and the reach reliability can be varied depending on the timing at which the background change notice is executed after the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is executed.

  The effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S712 or determines that the prefetching notice effect is being executed in the process of step S703 (step S703: Yes), the prefetching notice restriction is in effect in the process of step S704. When it is determined that there is (step S704: Yes), when it is determined in step S709 that the current reserved memory number (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) is not “3” or “4”, or When it is determined that the variation category up to the previous time is not only non-reachable (step S709: No), or when it is determined that "do not execute" in the process of step S711 (step S711: Yes), start The first start opening winning designation command stored in the received command buffer at the time of winning is the first starting opening winning designation frame. De determined whether the (first hold storage addition number designation command) (step S713).

  When the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the first start opening winning designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) has been received in the process of step S713 (step S713: Yes), the first reserved memory display unit 18c As the hold display, control is performed to update the display portion corresponding to the newly reserved special figure game (variable display of the symbol) using the first special figure (first special symbol) (step S714). In step S714, the production control CPU 101 performs control to update the hold display in the first hold storage display unit 18c in a normal display mode (for example, round white display). Thereafter, the prefetch notice determination process is terminated.

  If the CPU 101 for effect control determines that it is not the first start opening winning designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) in the process of step S713 (step S713: No), the second reserved memory display unit 18d. As the hold display in, control is performed to update the display portion corresponding to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure (second special symbol) is newly put on hold (step S715). In step S715, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to update the hold display in the second hold storage display unit 18d in a normal display mode (for example, a round white display). Thereafter, the prefetch notice determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S707 that the command at the time of starting winning is not normally received (step S707: No), the CPU for effect control 101 determines that the latest command in the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning is not determined. Information is set (step S731). For example, an undetermined information storage area is provided for each buffer number in the start winning reception command buffer, and the undetermined information of the buffer number corresponding to the latest command is set to “1” (or ON state).

  When the processing of step S731 is executed, the effect control CPU 101 indicates the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number as the hold display in the first hold memory display unit 18c and the second hold memory display unit 18d. The display part is changed to a common non-normal display mode (for example, round gray display), and the display part corresponding to the newly held display is also displayed in the common non-normal display mode (step S732). The display mode at the time of abnormal is different from the normal display mode or special display mode in part or all of the display color, display shape, display character, etc. of the display part, and the command at the start winning prize is received. This is a mode in which it is possible to notify that the damage has occurred. Note that only the display portion corresponding to the newly reserved state is set as the display mode at the time of non-normality, but the display mode in other display portions may not be changed.

  After performing the process of step S732, the effect control CPU 101 performs setting for restricting the prefetching notice (for example, setting the prefetching notice restriction flag to the on state) (step S733), and ends the prefetching notice determination process.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 101 does not execute the process of step S710 when it is determined in the prefetch notice determination process that the command at the start winning prize cannot be received normally in the process of step S707. The execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted.

  When the CPU 101 for effect control fails to receive a part or all of the determination result information (for example, the symbol designating command or the variable category command) that designates the determination result when the start winning is generated to be recognizable, it is stored in the reserved memory. You may restrict | limit so that a prefetch notice effect may not be performed until execution of the corresponding variable display is complete | finished. In that case, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice effect and the variable display result from being inconsistent, so that the player does not feel distrust.

  In addition, when the CPU 101 for effect control fails to receive a part of the determination result information, even if it is possible to recognize the determination result based on other determination result information, the prefetch notice effect based on the determination result is executed. You may restrict so as not to. In that case, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice effect from being executed based on information with low credibility so that the player is not distrusted.

  In addition, the production control CPU 101 restricts the pre-reading notice production based on the determination result recognizable by any of the determination result information to not be executed when the determination results recognizable from the plurality of determination result information are not consistent. Also good. In that case, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice effect from being executed based on information with low credibility so that the player is not distrusted.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs the high opening control associated with the time reduction control when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure. When in the high base state, the pre-reading notice effect based on the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening may be restricted. When the high opening control is being performed, it is possible to continue to execute the special game using the second special figure that is preferentially executed by passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening. . Then, before the end of the jackpot gaming state, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is started based on the hold data of the special figure game using the first special figure, and the prefetching notice effect is continuously executed even after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Then, the variable display can be continuously executed many times while holding the hold data or the like in which the variable display result is “big hit”, and the special display game using the second special figure is executed to make the variable display. The result is a “hit” and the game is repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state, which may increase the gambling characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, while recognizing that the variable display result is “big hit” in the special game using the first special figure, the player repeatedly passes (enters) the game ball to the second start winning opening to make the second special game. Depending on whether the special figure game using the figure is repeatedly executed or the special figure game using the first special figure is executed without passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening, the variable display result is “ There is a possibility that the timing of becoming a “hit” and being controlled to the big win gaming state may be greatly changed depending on the skill of the player. Therefore, by limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the occurrence of the first start prize when in the high base state, the variable display result becomes “big hit” corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. It is possible to ensure sound gameability by preventing the player from recognizing the possibility.

  Further, when the production control CPU 101 fails to receive part or all of the stored storage information (for example, the start opening prize designation command) in the high base state, even if the design designation command or the variable category command is received. Even if the determination result information is normally received, it may be limited not to execute the prefetch notice effect. In that case, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be “big hit” corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. Sex can be secured.

  Further, when the production control CPU 101 fails to receive a part of the stored storage information (for example, the start opening prize designation command), at least a part of the prefetching notice effect (for example, the prefetching notice effect having the lowest reliability). ) May be executed. In that case, it is possible to execute the prefetching notice effect by using the command that can be normally received as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the prefetching notice effect from being excessively lowered.

  In addition, when the CPU 101 for effect control fails to receive a part of the determination result information (for example, the symbol designating command or the variation category command), at least a part of the prefetching notice effect (for example, the prefetching notice with the lowest reliability). Production etc.) may be executed. In that case, it is possible to execute the prefetching notice effect by using the command that can be normally received as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the prefetching notice effect from being excessively lowered.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 may execute at least a part of the prefetching notice effect (for example, the prefetching notice effect having the lowest reliability) when the determination results that can be recognized from the plurality of pieces of determination result information do not match. Good. In that case, it is possible to execute the prefetching notice effect by using the command that can be normally received as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the prefetching notice effect from being excessively lowered.

  The effect control CPU 101 executes the prefetching notice determination process (step S161), and then executes the prefetching notice restriction release setting process (step S162). In the prefetching notice restriction release setting process, when prefetching notice restriction is restricted so that the prefetching notice effect is not executed, a process for releasing the restriction based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a prefetching notice effect being executed are performed. In response to the completion, a process for enabling execution of a new prefetch notice effect is executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice execution flag is on, every time the change starts, the value of the remaining notice counter is decremented by 1, and the remaining notice counter is 0. The pre-reading notice execution flag is reset to the off state.

  In addition, when the prefetch notice restriction flag is in the on state, the effect control CPU 101 has the start number stored effectively corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “8” in the start winning reception command buffer. With respect to the command at the time of winning, the restriction that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed is canceled on the condition that all the orders and contents can be received correctly (for example, the pre-reading notice restriction flag is cleared). In addition, the restriction that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed is canceled on condition that the pending storage in which the command has not been received (despite being transmitted on the transmission side) or the determination result is inconsistent is exhausted. You may do it.

  The effect control CPU 101 executes the prefetch notice restriction release setting process (step S162), and then selects and executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variable display start waiting process, whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 9 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 31 is received. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the decorative symbols in the effect display device 9 In order to perform the variable display and other various effects, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 101 reads out various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer, and performs various effect controls during variable display of the decorative symbols. . After performing the effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern at the time of changing the special symbol, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, etc. Corresponding to the above, the definite decorative symbol as a variable symbol display result (final stop symbol) is displayed in a completely stopped state. Corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (fluctuation pattern command) if the fixed decoration symbol is displayed completely stopped in response to the end code being read from the special figure fluctuation production control pattern When the variable display time to be passed has elapsed, even if the production control command from the main board 31 is not used, it is possible to autonomously derive and display the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 80 side to confirm the variable display result. it can. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received. When the hit start specifying command is received and the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit “ Update to 6 ″. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit “ Update to 4 ". Also, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “out of”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or outputting sound or sound effect from the speaker 27 based on a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 70, frame LED 28 or decoration based on the output of a command (lighting signal) to the lamp driver board 35 Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED 25 is executed. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 31. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state and the like, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The frame LED 28 based on the output of a command (effect signal) from the speaker 27 and the output of the command (lighting signal) to the lamp driver substrate 35. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED 25 at the end of the small hit gaming state are executed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 9. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speaker 27 based on the output of the command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 70, and the frame LED 28 and decoration are output based on the output of the command (lighting signal) to the lamp driver board 35. Various effects control in the big hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED 25 is executed. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 31, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The sound and sound effects are output from the speaker 27 based on the output of the command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 70, and the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 are output based on the output of the command (electric signal) to the lamp driver board 35. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, for example, the effect control CPU 101 displays the special figure display result based on the EXT data in the variable display result notification command (display result specifying command) (display result specifying command) transmitted from the main board 31. It is determined whether or not “disconnect” is set (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “out of” (step S522: Yes), the effect control CPU 101, for example, the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main board 31. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the specified variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S523).

  When it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523: Yes), the production control CPU 101 determines a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a non-reach combination ( Step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like and stored in advance in the ROM. With reference to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L in the display area of the effect display device 9 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like, and refers to a predetermined right determined symbol determining table stored in advance in the ROM, Of the determined decorative symbols, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display region 9R in the display area of the effect display device 9 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol based on the setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM is referred to, and the effect of the fixed decorative symbol is produced. The medium-decorated decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9 </ b> C in the display area of the display device 9 is determined. In the process of step S524, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that is a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the variable symbol notice is being executed.

  When it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523: No), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of confirmed decorative symbols constituting the reach combination (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, the production control CPU 101 first extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left / right fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like, and predetermined left / right fixed stored in advance in the ROM. Referring to the symbol determination table, the ornament symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display regions 9L and 9R in the display area of the effect display device 9 among the confirmed ornament symbols. To decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like is extracted, and an effect display is displayed among the fixed decorative symbols with reference to a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM. The medium-decorated decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9 </ b> C in the display area of the device 9 is determined. Note that, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, for example, an arbitrary value ( For example, “1”) is added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol to obtain a reach combination in which the confirmed decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination. Further, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, a difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and a medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “out of” (step S522: No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. If there is, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or other cases (step S526). When the effect control CPU 101 determines that it is “surprise” or “small hit” (step S526: Yes), for example, a chance of opening, a definite decoration corresponding to the case of “surprise” or “small hit” A combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, the CPU 101 for effect control corresponds to the case where any variation pattern for suddenness / small hit is designated by a variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command), and one of a plurality of types of opening chances is selected. To determine the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, numerical data indicating a random number for chance determination that is updated by a random counter or the like, and refers to a predetermined chance determination table stored in advance in the ROM, thereby opening the chance. Determine the combination of definitive decorative symbols that make up any of the eyes. In addition, when any variation pattern that designates the reach is designated by the variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command), for example, the same process as in step S525 is executed, thereby confirming the decorative pattern constituting the reach combination. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of.

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines in the process of step S526 that it is "non-probability change" or "probability change" other than "surprise" or "small hit" (step S526: No), the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination Is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, the effect control CPU 101 first extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot fixed symbol updated by a random counter, and stores a predetermined jackpot fixed symbol stored in advance in the ROM. Referring to the determination table, the decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the screen of the effect display device 9 are displayed. To decide. At this time, a different decorative design may be determined as a determined decorative design depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, or whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit.

  Specifically, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the effect control CPU 101 selects any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols and determines the definite ornament that constitutes the non-probable big hit combination. Decide on a design. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected, and a definite ornament symbol that constitutes a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. To decide. If it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of a non-probable big hit combination, there is no notification that it will be controlled to a probable change state in the redrawing effect during variable display, for example, during a big hit executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by promotion effect. In addition, when it is determined to be a confirmed decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination, a notification that the probability change state is controlled is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  The effect control CPU 101 executes the pre-reading notice execution setting process after executing any of the processes of steps S524, S525, S527, and S528 (step S535). FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch notice execution setting process. In the prefetching advance notice execution setting process shown in FIG. 69, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the prefetching notice execution flag is on (step S601). If the pre-reading notice execution flag is in an off state (step S601: No), the prefetching notice execution setting process ends.

  When the pre-reading notice execution flag is on (step S601: Yes), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading notice execution number counter (step S602). Then, based on the value of the prefetching notice execution frequency counter and the prefetching notice effect control pattern set, settings for executing the prefetching notice effect are performed (step S603). In the process of step S603, the effect control CPU 101 may perform settings for executing the pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the effect contents shown in FIG. Further, in the case of the pre-reading notice effect control pattern for executing the stop symbol notice, the effect control CPU 101 may execute a process of determining which chance chance shown in FIG. 65 is to be stopped. In that case, instead of the non-reach combination determined in step S524 in FIG. 67, control for stopping and displaying the chance eye A or chance eye B is executed.

  In the case of the pre-reading notice effect control pattern for executing the background change notice, the effect control CPU 101 executes control for stopping and displaying the non-reach combination determined in the process of step S524 in FIG. In the case of the pre-reading advance notice control pattern for executing the stop symbol advance notice, the effect control CPU 101 replaces the process of determining the non-reach combination in step S524 of FIG. A process for determining the eye B may be executed. In addition, when the pre-reading notice execution setting process is executed before the process of step S524 of FIG. 67 and the chance of the stop display is determined, the process of step S524 of FIG. 67 is not executed. It may be. In the case of such control, duplication of processing for determining a stop symbol can be avoided.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is 0 (step S604). If the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is not 0 (step S604: No), the prefetching notice execution setting process is terminated.

  When the value of the pre-reading notice execution number counter is 0 (step S604: Yes), the effect control CPU 101 clears the pre-reading notice execution flag to an off state (step S605). When the value of the prefetching notice execution number counter is 0, the current change is a change that is a target of the prefetching notice effect, and the prefetching notice effect ends. Thereafter, the prefetch advance notice execution setting process is terminated.

  After executing the pre-reading notice execution setting process in step S535, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the changing notice effect is executed, and the changing notice pattern corresponding to the changing aspect of the changing notice effect when executed. (Step S529). For example, in the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 101 selects a changing notice determination table prepared in advance as a use table for determining the presence / absence of changing notice effect and a changing notice pattern.

  In the changing notice determination table, the variable display result specified from the variable display result notification command (display result specifying command) (display result specifying command), the change pattern specified from the change pattern specifying command (change pattern command), etc. Depending on the value, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random number for determining the changing notice type is “no execution” corresponding to the case where the changing notice effect is not executed, and the changing notice effect is executed. It is only necessary to be assigned to a plurality of changing notice patterns in the case of Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the during-change notice determination table based on, for example, the numerical data indicating the change-in-previous decision random number extracted from the random counter, and determines whether there is a change notice effect during the change and the notice during change. Determine the pattern.

  In step S529, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern at a decision rate as shown in FIG. 68 (A), for example. In the determination ratio setting example shown in FIG. 68 (A), the fluctuation pattern varies depending on whether it corresponds to “non-reach out”, “reach out”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. The presence / absence of the medium notice effect and the determination ratio of the changing notice pattern are different.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern is “reach out of reach”, the proportion of the notice effect during change is executed (ratio determined other than “no notice execution”) than when it is “non-reach out”. )Is high. Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the rate of execution of the changing notice effect is higher than when “non-reach out”, “reach out of reach”, and “small hit”. In each change notice pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to “big hit” increases in the order of “notice Z”, “notice Y”, and “notice X”. With such a setting, it is possible to notify or suggest that the variable display result will be a “hit” or that the reach will be executed by executing the changing notice effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a specific pre-reading notice effect is executed, the presence / absence of a changing notice effect and a changing notice pattern are changed at a special determination rate as shown in FIG. 68 (B). Is determined. Specifically, in the case where the prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 in which the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice is executed, before the background change notice is executed yet. In some cases, the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the changing notice pattern are determined at a special determination ratio as shown in FIG. 68 (B).

  Note that when the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the variable display result up to the change that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is “non-reach out”, so FIG. 68B shows the case of “non-reach out” Only the decision rate is shown. In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 68B, the ratio determined as “notice Y” is higher than the determination ratio in the case of “non-reach” in FIG. When the notice effect is executed, it is always determined as “notice Y”). With such a setting, when the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is being executed, it is possible to indicate to the player that the background change notice will be executed according to the effect mode of the changing notice effect. Will improve.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the “notice Z” changing notice effect is executed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the “notice Y” changing notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player may be discouraged when the notice effect during fluctuation of “notice Y” is normally executed. However, when the pre-reading notice effect of “preliminary notice Y” is executed when the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is being executed, the ratio (pre-reading) of the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice after that is executed. The ratio of the notice pattern SYP3-1) increases. The prefetching notice effect of the prefetching notice pattern SYP3-1 has the highest jackpot reliability among the prefetching notice effects. Therefore, when the prefetching notice effect of the stop symbol notice is being executed, the notice notice effect during the change of “notice Y” Even if is executed, the subsequent display result can be expected, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the interest of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that the effect mode of each changing notice pattern only needs to be different so that they can be distinguished from each other. For example, the notice X is a changing notice pattern for executing a changing notice effect for “character display”, and the notice Y is a changing notice pattern for executing a changing notice effect for “step-up operation”. Z is a changing notice pattern for executing the changing notice effect of “operation notice”.

  In the “character display” changing notice effect, an effect display in which a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position is displayed, for example, on the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the variable display of the decorative design.

  In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect display that switches and displays a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order. Depending on the situation, there may be an effect in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. In addition, in the changing notice effect during the “step-up operation”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is initially displayed in a predetermined order) is displayed, The effect display in the changing notice effect may be terminated without switching the effect image. In the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, the effect mode is changed in multiple stages (steps) by, for example, an effect of moving the movable member in a plurality of types of motion modes in a predetermined order during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Production) may be performed. It should be noted that in the “step-up operation” changing notice effect, the effect in the notice effect may be terminated without switching to the second stage effect after the movable member has produced an effect in one type of operation. You may do it.

  In the “notice of operation change” notice effect during change, for example, the display of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed in response to the operation button 120 being operated by the player during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Or changing the sound output from the speaker 27 to change the production contents. As an example, in the change notice of “operation notice”, a predetermined effect that is an operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of decorative symbols. In the operation promotion effect, for example, a character image, a message image, or the like prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the player is prompted to operate the operation button 120 in a predetermined operation mode. If it is.

  In this embodiment, the during-change notice effects of “character display”, “step-up operation”, and “operation notice” are executed at different timings from the start of change to the end of change. Specifically, the execution timing of “operation notice” is the earliest, and the execution timing of “character display” is the latest. Therefore, the big hit reliability differs depending on not only the effect mode of the changing notice effect but also the execution timing. Further, when the pre-reading notice effect for the stop symbol notice is being executed, it is possible to indicate to the player that the background change notice is executed according to the execution timing of the changing notice effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  After performing the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect execution setting during other variable display (step S530). In the process of step S530, the CPU 101 for effect control may perform setting for executing an effect different from the pre-reading notice effect and the changing notice effect. As such an effect, for example, an effect in which a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speaker 27 at a predetermined timing at the start or execution of variable display, for example. In addition, by performing a predetermined aspect including a part or all of the effects in which the flash lamp included in the frame LED 28 shines or the like, an immediate notification that the variable display result is “big hit” ( An effect of a one-shot notification mode of definite notification) may be executed. As such an effect, there is an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit”.

  Further, in the process of step S530, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result may be a “big hit”, for example, a setting for executing a predetermined aspect for liveliness may be performed. Specifically, it is only necessary that an effect of a predetermined mode such as an effect of a mode in which a predetermined lamp included in the frame LED 28 shines can be executed.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect control pattern as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S531). The production control CPU 101 selects, for example, one of a plurality of special figure variation production control patterns prepared in response to a variation pattern designated by a variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command) and sets it as a use pattern. To do. For example, when the setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect of the character display notice is made, the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the setting may be selected.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 sets an initial value of the production control process timer in accordance with, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (variation pattern command) (step S532). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 performs setting for starting the variation of the decorative symbols in the effect display device 9 (step S533). The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a display control command designated by the display control data included in the special figure variation effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in the process of step S531, and outputs the display control command of the effect display device 9 to the VDP 109. In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided on the screen, the variation of the decorative symbols is started. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and the variable display start setting process ends.

Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a, the first start opening In the switch passage process (see step S312) and the second start port switch passage process (see step S314), a winning random number determination process is executed.

  In the winning random number determination process, whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not a big hit, the determination result of the big hit type, and the range of the determination value range of the random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on the determination result, a symbol designation command and a variation category command are transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101, when executing the prefetching notice determination process (step S161), if the prefetching notice is not limited (step S704: No), the variation category up to the previous time is the prefetching notice. When it is a situation where the effect can be executed (step S709: Yes), the presence or absence of the prefetching notice effect and the prefetching notice pattern are determined in the process of step S710. Then, based on the determination result, a prefetch notice effect is executed over a plurality of variations.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice is executed. FIG. 70A shows that the variation of the decorative symbols is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9. . Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, the prefetching notice determination process shown in FIG. 63 is executed, and it is decided in step S710 that the prefetching notice pattern SYP1-2 is executed. To do. Note that because the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the prefetch notice effect control pattern SCP2-1 shown in FIG. 66 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the variation at that time is completed, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next variation. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 70C and 70D, for example, the chance eye CB1 (“1 · 2 · 3”) is stopped. Which chance B to stop is decided by the process of step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the prefetching notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 70 (E) and 70 (F), for example, the chance eye CB2 (“2 · 3 · 4”) is stopped.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (the change that is the target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 70, in response to the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 70 (G) to (I), the decoration that reaches after reaching the start of variation and constitutes the big hit combination. The symbol stops.

  As described above, in the pre-reading notice effect of the stop symbol notice, it is possible to give a notice of the possibility of being a big hit or reach by stopping a predetermined chance eye over a plurality of fluctuations. .

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed. FIG. 71 (A) shows that the decoration symbol variation is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. It is assumed that the prefetching advance notice determination process shown in FIG. 63 is executed based on the game ball winning in the first start winning opening 13, and it is decided in step S710 to execute the prefetching advance notice pattern SYP2-1. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the look-ahead notice effect control pattern SCP3-1 shown in FIG. 66 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 71C to 71E, for example, a character “chance” is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the background image in the effect display device 9 is displayed. The image changes from an image with the motif of the day (normal background image) to a background image with the motif of the night (special background image). The stop symbol is a decorative symbol constituting a non-reach off combination.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the start of the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 71 (F) and (G), the display of the background image with the motif of the night continues.

  Subsequently, in the third change after the start of the prefetching notice effect (the change that is the target of the prefetching notice effect), a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 71, in correspondence with the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 71 (H) to (J), the decoration is reached after the fluctuation is started and constitutes the big hit combination. The symbol stops. Even in the third change, the display of the background image with the night as a motif continues.

  As described above, in the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice, a special background image that is different from the usual is displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, thereby notifying the possibility of being a big hit or reaching. Can do. Note that the stop symbol during the execution of the background change notice is a combination of non-reach, but the chance may be stopped.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice. FIG. 72 (A) shows that the decoration symbols are changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. It is assumed that the prefetching advance notice determination process shown in FIG. 63 is executed based on the game ball winning at the first start winning opening 13, and it is decided to execute the prefetching advance notice pattern SYP3-1 in step S710. Note that because the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, in the process of step S712, a prefetch notice effect control pattern SCP4-1 shown in FIG. 66 is set.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 72C and 72D, for example, the chance eye CA1 (“1 · 1 · 2”) is stopped. Which chance A to stop is decided by the processing in step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the start of the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E) to (G), for example, a character “chance” is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the effect display device 9 The background image changes from an image having a day motif (normal background image) to a background image having a night motif (special background image). The stop symbol is a decorative symbol constituting a non-reach off combination.

  Subsequently, a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed as a third change (a change that is a target of the prefetch notice effect) after the prefetch notice effect is started. In the example shown in FIG. 72, in correspondence with the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 72 (H) to (J), the decoration is reached after the fluctuation is started and constitutes the big hit combination. The symbol is stopped and displayed. Even in the third change, the display of the background image with the night as a motif is continued.

  As described above, in the pre-reading notice effect in which the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice, the background change that changes to a special background image different from the normal after the stop sign notice that the chance eye A stops is executed. By executing the advance notice, it is possible to make an advance notice of the possibility of being a big hit or reaching.

  When a stop symbol notice is executed to stop the chance eye A, after that, when the background change notice is not executed, the background hit notice is executed although the highest hit reliability is the lowest among the pre-read notice effects. In this case, the reliability of the big hit is the highest in the pre-reading notice effect. Since the pre-reading notice pattern that changes (shifts) from the production mode indicating that the reliability is low to the production mode that indicates that the reliability is high is provided, the pre-reading notification pattern of the pattern with low reliability is executed. Even if it exists, a player's expectation can be maintained and the interest of a game improves.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. For example, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, as a prefetching notice effect pattern (prefetching notice pattern), prefetching in which the chance eye A predetermined in the effect display device 9 is stopped over a plurality of variable displays is performed. Preliminary notice pattern SYP1-1, pre-reading notice pattern SYP1-2 in which a chance eye B predetermined in the effect display device 9 stops over a plurality of variable displays, and the background image in the effect display device 9 from the normal background image The pre-reading notice pattern SYP2-1 in which the special background image is continuously displayed until the variable display that is the subject of the notice is executed and the special display image is changed to the special background image, and the chance predetermined for the effect display device 9 After the eye A stops, the background image on the effect display device 9 changes from a normal background image to a special background image. That variable display until its prefetching special background image is continuously displayed notice patterns SYP3-1 is executed has been provided. The pattern of the prefetching notice effect is not limited to these, and a pattern of the prefetching notice effect other than these may be provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 73, as the prefetching notice pattern of the prefetching notice effect executed over four fluctuations, the chance eye A stops at the first fluctuation, and the chance eye B stops at the second fluctuation. The background image may be changed to a special background image in the third change, and the change may be continuously executed in the special background image in the fourth change. By providing such a pre-reading notice pattern, it is possible to produce an effect in which the jackpot reliability is stepped up step by step, allowing the player to pay attention to changes in the production mode, and improving the fun of the game To do.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pre-reading notice pattern is determined by determining the pre-reading notice pattern. However, as a result, the same as in the above-described embodiment. As long as the control for executing the pre-reading notice effect is performed, the method of determining the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to the method of the above embodiment.

  For example, in a plurality of fluctuations until the fluctuation that is the target of the prefetching notice effect is executed, the prefetching notice effect of the production mode is executed anytime based on the display result and the fluctuation category of the fluctuation that is the target of the prefetching notice effect. It may be determined for each change. Specifically, when the display result of the fluctuation that is the target of the prefetching notice effect is “big hit”, it is only necessary that the prefetching notice effect of the production mode with higher jackpot reliability is easily executed. In that case, it is preferable to store the effect mode in the previous variation so that the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode having a lower jackpot reliability than the effect mode of the previous variation is not executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect that a big hit reliability falls as a prefetch notice effect (continuous effect) progresses.

  In the above embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed, the timing of changing from the normal background image to the special background image is not particularly mentioned, but the background change notice is executed. The timing for changing from a normal background image to a special background image may be changed at different timings.

  For example, the normal background image may be changed to a special background image either at the start of change or at the end of change in the change for executing the background change notice. In that case, for example, when it is determined in step S710 shown in FIG. 63 other than “no execution” corresponding to not executing the pre-reading notice effect (step S711: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the pre-reading notice pattern is SYP3-1 corresponding to the background change notice being executed after the stop symbol notice (step S751). When the prefetch notice pattern is other than SYP3-1 (step S751: No), the process proceeds to step S712.

  If the pre-reading notice pattern is SYP3-1 (step S751: Yes), it is determined whether the change timing of the background image in the background change notice is to be at the start of change or at the end of change (step S752). . By adopting the start of change or the end of change as the change timing of the background image, the difference in change timing becomes clear to the player, and an effect that is easy to understand for the player can be executed.

  In the process of step S752, the change timing is changed at a different rate depending on whether the variation category that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is “non-reach out”, “reach out”, “accuracy / small hit”, or “big hit”. To decide. For example, in the process of step S752, the change timing may be determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG.

  In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 74B, the change timing is easily determined at the end of the change regardless of the change category. If the background image does not change at the start of the change, the player expects the background image to change at the end of the change, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 74B, when the variation category is “big hit”, it is easily determined at the end of the variation. With such a setting, the jackpot reliability when the timing at which the background image changes in the background change notice is at the end of the change can be made higher than the jackpot reliability at the start of the change. Note that by increasing the jackpot reliability when the background image changes at the end of the change, if the background image does not change at the start of the change, the player changes the background image at the end of the change. As a result, it is expected that the jackpot reliability will be high, so that the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  Note that, contrary to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 74B, the change timing may be easily determined at the start of the change regardless of the change category, or when the change category is “big hit”, You may make it easy to determine at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of the big hit reliability and the like at an early stage, and it is possible to pay attention to the start of fluctuation.

  In FIG. 74A, the change timing of the background image in the background change notice is determined only when the prefetch notice pattern is SYP3-1. However, when the prefetch notice pattern is SYP2-1. In addition, the change timing of the background image may be determined.

  After determining the change timing of the background image in step S752, the process proceeds to step S712. In this modification, a pattern as shown in FIG. 75 is provided as the prefetch notice effect control pattern of the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1 according to the change timing. Then, in the process of step S712, according to the determination result in step S752, the pre-reading notice effect control pattern SCP4-1-1 (when the change timing starts to change with the number of reserved memories 3), SCP4-1-2 (the number of reserved memories). 3 when the change timing ends at the end of change), SCP4-2-1 (when the change timing starts when the number of pending storages is 4), or SCP4-2-2 (when the change timing ends when the change ends when the number of held memories is 4) Should be set.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice and the change timing of the background change notice is the start of change. FIG. FIG. 76 (A) shows that the decoration symbol variation is being executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. 63 is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, and in step S710, it is decided to execute the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1. It is assumed that the change timing is determined at the start of change in the process of S752. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the prefetch notice effect control pattern SCP4-1-1 shown in FIG. 75 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), when the change at that time is finished, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next change. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 76 (C) and 76 (D), for example, the chance eye CA1 (“1 · 1 · 2”) is stopped and displayed. Which chance A to stop is decided by the processing in step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second fluctuation after the start of the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), the background image in the effect display device 9 at the start of the fluctuation is from an image (normal background image) with the daytime motif. It changes to a background image with a night motif (special background image). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the decorative symbols constituting the non-reach off combination are stopped and displayed. Note that the chance eye A may be stopped and displayed.

  Subsequently, a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed as a third change (a change that is a target of the prefetch notice effect) after the prefetch notice effect is started. In the example shown in FIG. 76, in correspondence with the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 76 (G) to (I), the ornament that becomes the reach after the change starts and constitutes the big hit combination. The symbol is stopped and displayed. Even in the third change, the display of the background image with the night as a motif continues.

  FIG. 77 illustrates an example of a display operation in the effect display device 9 when the pre-reading notice effect of the background change notice is executed after the stop symbol notice, and the change timing of the background change notice is the start of change. FIG. FIG. 77 (A) shows that the decoration symbol variation is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. 63 is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, and in step S710, it is decided to execute the prefetch notice pattern SYP3-1. It is assumed that the change timing is determined at the end of the change in the process of S752. Since the number of reserved memories is 3 due to the winning at this time, the look-ahead notice effect control pattern SCP4-2-1 shown in FIG. 77 is set in the process of step S712.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), when the variation at that time is completed, the pre-reading notice effect is started from the next variation. In the first change in which the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 77 (C) and (D), for example, the chance eye CA1 (“1 · 1 · 2”) is stopped and displayed. Which chance A to stop is decided by the processing in step S603 in FIG.

  Then, in the second variation after the pre-reading notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), after the decorative symbol variation is started, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the non-reach out of combination When the decorative symbols that make up the image stop (at the end of the change), the background image in the effect display device 9 is a background image with a night motif (special background image) from an image with a day motif (normal background image) To change. Note that the chance may be stopped.

  Subsequently, a change corresponding to the determined change pattern is executed as a third change (a change that is a target of the prefetch notice effect) after the prefetch notice effect is started. In the example shown in FIG. 77, in correspondence with the big hit variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 77 (G) to (I), the decoration is reached after the fluctuation starts, and constitutes the big hit combination. The symbol is stopped and displayed. Even in the third change, the display of the background image with the night as a motif continues.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the big hit reliability is higher when the background changes at the end of the fluctuation than when the background changes at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. By increasing the jackpot reliability when the timing when the background image changes is at the end of change, if the background image does not change at the start of change, the player changes the background image at the end of change, Since it is expected that the jackpot reliability will be high, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the fluctuation time, the type of reach production, and the presence / absence of pseudo-continuity (the production in which at least one temporary stop and re-fluctuation of a symbol is executed during one variable display). In order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the mode, an example of transmitting one change pattern command when starting change has been shown. However, the change pattern is controlled with two or more commands. The microcomputer 100 may be notified. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 is the first command before reaching a reach such as the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of a slide effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop) is sent, and after reaching the reach, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect as the second command (if it does not reach reach) You may make it transmit the command which shows the variation time and variation mode after what is called a 2nd stop. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific change mode executed at each timing. . When two commands are transmitted, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer A second command may be sent (in interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and encloses a game medium such as a game ball to give a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the type.

  For the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, it has been described that the process (S29 in FIG. 52) of outputting information (data) related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through S29 may include a winning information signal that can identify the winning slot where the game ball has won and the number of winning prizes.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a first start winning opening 13, a second starting winning opening 14, a large winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20), and a winning opening (normal winning opening) 29, 30, 33, A plurality of types of prize winning openings such as 39 are provided. Then, the winning of game balls in these winning holes is detected by a winning detection switch such as a first starting port switch 13a, a second starting port switch 14a, a count switch 23, and a winning port switch, and the detection signal is a game. The data is input to the control microcomputer 560.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, processing for counting and storing the number of game balls (winning number) won in each winning port during a predetermined period based on the detection signal input from the winning detection switch. It is possible, and by performing such processing, winning information that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won during a predetermined period is stored. The game control microcomputer 560, based on such winning information, receives a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning points that the game ball has won in each predetermined period each time a predetermined period elapses. Is output from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The number of winnings specified by the winning information signal that can be counted and stored in the game control microcomputer 560 and the winning mouth and the winning number that the game ball won can be specified is, for example, every predetermined elapsed time such as every 10 minutes. Information on the number of winnings (output every predetermined elapsed time), information on the number of winnings for each period required to generate one big hit gaming state (output every time a big winning gaming state occurs), each day Information regarding the number of winnings since the power was turned on (output every predetermined elapsed time), and information regarding the number of winnings for each player (when the player can be specified by player specifying information such as game card information) In addition, any information may be output when the end of the game is selected by each player.

  In addition, as the winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the winning number that the game ball has won, the winning opening and the winning number (one piece) that are output every time the gaming ball wins any of the winning holes, and May be a winning information signal that can identify the

  Further, as another example of outputting the winning information signal to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to perform an operation test on a part of the output terminals of the main board 11 with a test device provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. These connection parts may be connected, and a winning information signal indicating the latest winning information in the current gaming state may be output from the gaming control microcomputer 560 to the outside via the connecting portion.

  In this way, a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning points of the game balls is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the winning opening where the gaming balls have won outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. It is possible to recognize winning information that can specify the number of winnings.

[Second Embodiment]
As the second embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine having the game control as an example of the game control, such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment, is configured as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine (pachinko gaming machine). An example of a system for managing the pachinko machine and the card unit will be described. Note that the gaming machine, card unit, and system for managing them described as the second embodiment below may be applied to any of the gaming machine and card unit described as the first embodiment.

  The present invention shown by the embodiment described below is a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and includes a first control means and a second control means that communicate with each other, It relates to a game board and a game frame.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, it includes a first control means communicably connected to an authentication information management apparatus and a second control means communicably connected to the first control means, and the first control means and the second control A means is disclosed as a pair authentication information, and a second control means is disclosed as a gaming machine in which one of the pair authentication information is stored in advance (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-1000076).

  Conventionally, for example, there is one that performs transmission / reception of ciphertexts using a common key cryptosystem between a main CPU that controls the gaming state of a gaming machine and a sub-CPU that controls, for example, a variable display device (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-2000). -89701).

  In the gaming machine, when the first control means and the second control means communicate with each other, there is a possibility that the communication between the two control means is interrupted and the communication between the two becomes impossible. Assuming such a situation, it is necessary to predetermine a return procedure after communication between the two becomes impossible. In this case, if the predetermined information that has been generated on the one hand and is scheduled to be transmitted to the other side has not reached the other side, a return process in which the predetermined information is transmitted to the other side must be determined upon return.

  However, if such a return process is included in the user program executed by the control means, the control burden on the control means executing the user program increases.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to reduce the control burden related to the return processing after the communication between the first control means and the second control means becomes impossible. That is.

(1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control part 161F) and second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 107, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 108, etc.);
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control units 600F, 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and the return process On the condition (SF292 in FIG. 110: a flag indicating the completion of recovery is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F in FIG. 110), the generation of the predetermined information by the execution of the user program 110 (SF293 in FIG. 110: A signal for starting the processing of the user program is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping unit is canceled and the processing of the user program is restarted).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(2) In (1) above,
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the processing is appropriately restarted in both the first control unit and the second control unit. be able to.

(3) In the above (1) or (2),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuit (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).
When transmitting the predetermined information, the communication control circuit also transmits arrival confirmation information updated in accordance with a predetermined update pattern to confirm the arrival of the predetermined information (FIG. 113: to the payout control unit 171F) Send the power-on notification command including the serial number sent last time (main control serial number = n + 1)),
The communication control circuit of one of the first control means and the second control means resends the arrival confirmation information transmitted last time when returning from the communication disabled state (FIG. 113: Power supply for the command of power-on notification) Send response of input / output)
The first control means or the second control means including the other communication control circuit includes the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before communication is disabled. Is not based on the predetermined information (FIG. 113: main control sequence number = n + 1 and payout control sequence number = n do not match) based on the predetermined information transmitted by the one communication control circuit by the return processing. Information update processing (FIG. 113: recovery processing is executed) is executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before the communication is disabled are not in a predetermined relationship, one communication control is performed by the return process. Since the information updating process based on the predetermined information transmitted by the circuit is executed, the communication burden between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced.

(4) In the above (1) to (3),
The information storage unit includes a nonvolatile storage area (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 107, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 108) and a volatile storage area (for example, a register other than the transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 107). And registers other than the data reception register 713F shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, since the information storage unit has the nonvolatile storage area and the volatile storage area, it is possible to suppress the amount of data required in the recovery process when communication is resumed.

(5) In the above (1) to (4),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 108: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(6) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 107) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 600F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined manner (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 161bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. 110 (SF 292 in FIG. 110: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F), the generation of the predetermined information is resumed by executing the user program (SF 293 in FIG. 110: user program). A signal for starting the above process is transmitted, or the process of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the process of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(7) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control part 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). ,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 108) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. 110 (SF 292 in FIG. 110: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery request / completion register 718F), the generation of the predetermined information by execution of the user program is resumed (SF 293 in FIG. 110: user A signal for starting the program processing is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the processing of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(8-1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control unit 161F) and second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 107, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 108, etc.);
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF);
Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for transmitting encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is a decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information transmitted by the other (for example, the communication control circuit 161bF decrypts the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). including.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit encrypts the information stored in the information storage unit by the encryption unit of the communication control circuit and transmits the information transmitted by the other decryption unit. Since the information is decrypted, the processing of the encrypted communication performed between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and the contents of the encrypted information can be prevented from leaking and the security from being lowered. it can.

(8-2) In the above (8-1),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the encrypted communication process is performed in both the first control unit and the second control unit. In addition to mitigation, it is possible to prevent the content of encrypted information from leaking and reducing security.

(8-3) In the above (8-1) or (8-2),
The communication control circuit is configured to generate an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when power is turned on (for example, an encryption key and a decryption key are generated by an authentication sequence performed when the power is turned on shown in FIG. 110); A process of performing cryptographic communication using the encryption key and decryption key generated by the process is executed (after the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 110, encrypted communication is possible using the generated encryption key and decryption key).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit executes a process of generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when the power is turned on, and a process of performing encryption communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process Therefore, it is possible to reduce the encryption communication process performed between the first control unit and the second control unit, and to appropriately restart the process in at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit. .

(8-4) In the above (8-1) to (8-3),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 108: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(8-5) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 107) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF);
The second control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF) Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(8-6) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). There,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 108) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF);
The first control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(9-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and the gaming machine is communicatively connected, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 81: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 89). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 91: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P stand 2F sends a command of state information response including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, counting processing means for counting the game points to the points (FIG. 91: CU3F is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 78: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
The recording medium processing means (FIG. 91: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F) that processes the holding points counted by the counting processing means in an identifiable manner with the recording medium received by the recording medium reception means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 91: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 91: CU3F prepares for card return when card removal is possible) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal is notified to P stand 2F.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-2) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player to play a game in the gaming machine. A gaming device (CU3F) that enables
Count processing means for counting the game points based on the count request from the gaming machine (FIG. 91: When the CU3F receives a status information response including information of count request = ON, the requested counting ball And add the number to the number of balls.)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 78: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
The recording medium processing means (FIG. 91: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F) that processes the holding points counted by the counting processing means in an identifiable manner with the recording medium received by the recording medium reception means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 91: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 91: CU3F prepares for card return when card removal is possible) The P table 2F is notified of information indicating that the state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-3) The present invention is connected to a gaming device (CU3F) that enables a game using a valuable value possessed by the player so as to be able to communicate, and a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game point when a winning occurs ( P stand 2F)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 81: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 89). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 91: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P stand 2F sends a command of state information response including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
When the points counted based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means are processed in a manner that can be specified by the recording medium received by the gaming device, and the recording medium is returned, the recording medium is awaiting removal. (FIG. 91: When the card 2F is ready for card removal, the CU 3F notifies the card return preparation state OFF and card removal waiting ON information from the CU 3F. Receive.)

  According to the above configuration, since the game device receives a notification that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is in a removal waiting state, the game machine prompts the player to remove the recording medium. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-4) In the above (9-1) to (9-3),
The gaming apparatus includes notification means (for example, a display 312F shown in FIG. 78) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-5) In the above (9-1) to (9-3),
The gaming machine includes display means (for example, a variable display device 278F shown in FIG. 78) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed based on the notification from the gaming device.

  According to the above configuration, since it is possible to visually notify the gaming machine that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented.

(9-6) In the above (9-1) or (9-2),
The removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming device or a device connected to the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer, a call lamp on P units) that the recording medium is waiting to be removed. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium by notifying a device other than the gaming machine or gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

(9-7) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine in a communicable manner, and uses the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 78: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
When the recording medium is accepted by the recording medium accepting means, a game hall specifying information notifying means (FIG. 84) for notifying the gaming machine of game hall specifying information capable of specifying the game hall in which the gaming device is installed. When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including the “store code” added by the security board 325F to the P unit 2F.
The gaming machine is
Game hall identification information storage means (FIG. 84: P stand 2F stores the “store code” included in the insertion notification command) for storing the game hall identification information notified by the game hall identification information notification means. ,
The game room specifying information newly notified by the game hall specifying information notifying means when the communication is restored after recovering from the communication incapable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate, and the game hall specifying When a recovery request including a “store code” is transmitted from the CU 3F to the game hall specifying information comparing means for comparison with the game hall specifying information stored in the information storage means (FIG. 92: ”And the stored“ store code ”are determined to match.)
Game prohibition means for prohibiting continuation of the game when the game hall identification information is determined to be inconsistent by the game hall identification information comparison means (P store 2F stores “store code” from CU3F. If the store code does not match, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  According to the above configuration, if the newly notified game hall specifying information and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means do not match, the continuation of the game is prohibited. It is possible to prevent fraud in which the store is moved in the stored state.

(9-8) In the above (9-7),
The gaming device is:
A device capable of specifying a game control device (for example, security board 325F shown in FIG. 79) included in the game device when the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means and when the communication is restored. Device specific information notifying means for notifying the gaming machine of specific information (SC board ID) (FIG. 84: When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F receives the “SC board ID” added by the security board 325F. And a card insertion notification command including:
The gaming machine is
Device specifying information storage means for storing the device specifying information notified by the device specifying information notifying means (FIG. 84: P base 2F stores “SC board ID” included in the insertion notification command);
When the communication is recovered, the device specifying information comparing unit (P 2F) compares the device specifying information newly notified by the device specifying information notifying unit with the device specifying information stored in the device specifying information storing unit. Further compares “SC board ID” from CU3F with the stored “SC board ID”),
The game prohibiting means prohibits continuation of the game when the device specifying information comparing means determines that the device specifying information is inconsistent (in the case of mismatch, prohibiting continuation of the game).

  According to the above configuration, when the newly notified device identification information and the device identification information stored in the device identification information storage means do not match, the game is prohibited from being continued, so the counting balls are stored in the game medium. Unauthorized movement of the gaming machine in the state can be prevented.

(9-9) In the above (9-7) or (9-8) above,
The gaming machine is
A game hall identification information reading means for reading the game hall identification information added to the game medium used for the game (for example, a sensor is provided in the collection ball passage path of the P stand 2F, and the sensor is provided in the game ball. Read certain identification information (such as surface markings).
The game hall specifying information comparing means includes the game hall specifying information added to the game medium read by the game hall specifying information reading means, and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means. Compare (by the read identification information, it is determined whether or not it matches the identification information of the game ball of the own store, and in the case of a mismatch, the Bit 0 of the “illegal detection state 3” of the status information response is set to “1”. To do.)

  According to the above configuration, if the game hall identification information added to the game medium read by the game hall identification information reading means and the game hall identification information stored in the game hall identification information storage means do not match, the game medium It is possible to notify that game balls from other stores are mixed.

  Hereinafter, a second embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each amusement island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls (halls), an enclosed circulation pachinko machine as an example of a game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine). 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3F, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2F at a side position on a predetermined side of the P table 2F. Yes.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball (game ball) as an example of a game medium inside, and the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F to drive the launch motor 18F (see FIG. 79) and enclose it. Each ball is shot one by one into the game area 27F on the front of the game board 26F so that a game can be played. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the hitting operation handle 25F. Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted according to the amount of turning operation of the hitting operation handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  A keyhole 10F is provided above the hitting operation handle 25F, and the front frame 5F (see FIG. 79) is unlocked (for example, rotated clockwise) by inserting a key possessed by a game attendant. The frame 5F is opened, and the glass door 6F is opened by an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation) of the glass door (front member) 6F.

  78 is a so-called first type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided at the center of the game area 27F. In addition, the game area 27F is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 78, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271F, three normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, and three start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each start winning opening 275F, 276F, 277F. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271F is opened.

  In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27F are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 154F without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 154F are again returned to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path (not shown) in the P stand 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27F.

  The P base 2F causes the indicator 54F extending from the CU 3F to be fitted to the connection surface 54Fa provided on the front surface of the P base 2F by installing the CU 3F in a lateral position. Therefore, a display 54F is provided at a position below the game area 27F in the P stand 2F. The display device 54F is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the points, the remaining card amount, or the display of the variable display device 278F to the player. Further, the display 54F is fitted to the P base 2F by connecting a connection terminal (not shown) provided on the back surface to a connection terminal 54Fb provided on the connection surface 54Fa of the P base 2F. Thus, if it is the structure which fits the indicator 54F of CU3F to the connection surface 54Fa of P stand 2F, CU3F and P stand 2F can be connected more strongly and fraud can be prevented. Furthermore, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the display 54F from being released unless the glass door 6F or the lower door provided with the hitting ball operating handle 25F is opened. As shown in FIG. 78, the display 54F is not limited to the structure formed integrally with the CU 3F and fitted to the connection surface 54Fa of the P base 2F. The display 54F is formed independently of the CU 3F and is formed on the front surface of the P base 2F. The structure which can be attached may be sufficient.

  In addition, a game ball number display for displaying the number of game balls is provided above the connection surface 54Fa of the P stand 2F. The game ball number display 29F is composed of a 7-segment LED display and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The number of game balls display 29F displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like. Note that the game ball number display 29F is not limited to a 7-segment LED display, and may be a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  Furthermore, a counting button 28F for counting the gaming balls to the holding balls is provided on the left side of the gaming ball number display 29F on the P stand 2F. As will be described in detail later, when the count button 28F is pressed once, for example, 100 balls are counted from the game ball to the holding ball, and when pressed for a long period of time (long press), the game ball currently held is considered. Then, the number of game balls is counted from the number of balls corresponding to the number of balls pressed. Further, the counting speed is further improved when a card return operation is performed, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  Thus, since the counting button 28F is provided on the P base side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P base can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28F is provided on the CU side. In addition, the P platform 2F is provided with speakers 270F for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with the effects displayed on the variable display device 278F at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27F. Note that the position and number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 78, and the position and number may be changed as necessary.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 2F is a game machine that performs game control like the pachinko machine 1 described above as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, and the basic game control and effect control are performed by the pachinko machine 2F. Controls similar to those of the gaming machine 1 (for example, variable display control based on hold storage information, big hit game control based on hold storage information, and probability change control based on hold storage information) are performed.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the configuration of the CU3F according to the present embodiment will be described. This CU3F is a visitor card (hereinafter also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member who has registered as a member in the game hall. Receive a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a player. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU3F that accepts these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the card balance, the number of possessions, the number of accumulated balls, etc.) possessed by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2F, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining fireable shots. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU3F, a bill insertion slot 302F for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305F formed to project forward from the front of the device, a card insertion / discharge port 309F for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  The front side of the CU3F is specified by the indicator 312F and the member card ID (hereinafter also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID) recorded on the member card when the member card is received and the member card ID. An infrared signal is received by an IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit 320F from a replay button 319F for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls and a remote control (not shown) possessed by an attendant of the game hall and converted into an electronic signal. An IR light receiving unit for converting and outputting is provided.

  The display 312F displays a prepaid balance (hereinafter also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information. In addition to being able to display, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball Based on this, it becomes possible to play a game by the P stand 2F. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possessions is not recorded and the stored balls are recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the stored balls is withdrawn and converted into game balls Thus, a game by the P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding point are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the ball may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Number of possessed balls” is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  The “game ball” is data on the number of balls that can be fired by the gaming machine. As described above, this data is generated in exchange for withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card, the holding ball, or the stored ball.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but is stored in association with the membership card number in the hall server 801F (see FIG. 80) installed in the game hall such as the hall management computer. It is comprised so that the corresponding storage ball can be searched based on. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. When storing the hall server 801F in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801F may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is directly written on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding ball in the card (member card, visitor card) or the hall server 801F is, for example, stored in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored or stored in a lump when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the CU3F, the holding ball stored in the CU3F is temporarily stored as a stored ball in the hall server 801F, and the date when the player receives the return of the card When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3F again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3F, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302F is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320F, a ball lending button (hereinafter also referred to as a lending button) 321F, and a card return button 322F are further provided on the front side of the CU3F. The IR photosensitive unit 320F is an IR photosensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by an attendant of a game arcade, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the balance recorded on the inserted card and using it for a game by the P stand 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit and the pachinko machine. With reference to FIG. 79, the outline of the control circuit of CU3F and P stand 2F is demonstrated.

  The CU 3F is provided with a CU control unit 323F composed of a microcomputer or the like. Although not shown, the CU control unit 323F includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as an area, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 80) for security management, A security board (SC board) 325F is provided for communicating with the payout control board 17F while ensuring security. Note that the CU control unit 323F may be provided on the security board 325F, or the CU control unit 323F may be provided on a board different from the security board 325F. The CU3F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the P stand 2F side, and the P stand 2F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the CU3F side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325F on the CU side and the payout control board 17F on the P platform side are connected to each other via this connector and connection wiring so as to be communicable. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Although not shown, the security chip (SC) 325bF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided. Further, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P stand 2F. The server 800F (see FIG. 80) is notified. Also, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as board control information. Although not shown, the communication control IC 325aF includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a work area for the CPU. A functioning RAM (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  Each RAM of the CU control unit 323F, the security chip (SC) 325bF, and the communication control IC 325aF is configured by a backup RAM whose stored data is not erased even when the power is turned off. Note that an EEPROM may be used instead of the backup RAM.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money classifier, and the identification result signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. The card reader / writer reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323F, and the data to be written to the inserted card from the CU control unit 323F to the card reader / writer. When transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323F to the display control unit 350F, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350F. The display data converted by the display control unit 350F is output to the display 312F provided on the front surface of the CU3F and the display device 54F disposed on the front surface of the P stand 2F as shown in FIG. Images corresponding to the display data are displayed on the display 312F and the display 54F. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3F, and may be configured to be provided on the P base 2F and to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P base 2F includes a main control board 16F that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2F, a payout control board 17F that manages and stores game balls, and a launch motor 18F that drives and controls the launch motor 18F based on commands from the payout control board 17F. A control board 31F, a variable display device 278F (see FIG. 78), and the like are provided. 79, illustration of a display control board (also referred to as an effect control board) that controls display of the variable display device based on a command from the main control board 16F is omitted.

  The main control board 16F is provided on the game board 26F. The main control board 16F is equipped with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161F. The game control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161F is connected to a winning sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F. For example, a field-programmable gate array (FPGA) substrate is used for the game control microcomputer of the main controller 161F. The game board 26F is further provided with a display control board (effect control board) for controlling the variable display device 278F and the like.

  The payout control board 17F is provided in the front frame 5F (game frame). On the payout control board 17F, a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F is mounted. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. For example, an FPGA board is used for the payout control microcomputer of the payout control unit 171F.

  Also, for the payout control board 17F, a shot ball detection switch (not shown), an out ball detection switch 701F, a foul ball detection switch 330F, a counting button 28F, a radio wave sensor 173F, a glass door opening detection switch 12F, a front frame opening detection switch 13F is provided in an electrically connected state. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17F. As described above, the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection. To do. Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on due to unauthorized radio waves, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173F. In addition, there is a possibility that not only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF but also the shot ball detection switch may be subject to fraud by radio waves. In other words, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by the improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected, while the ball that has actually been shot is collected and detected by the shot detection switch The number of fired balls and recovered balls (out-balls) is wrinkled, an abnormality is detected, and the fraud detection information “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. Become. However, by sending unauthorized radio waves to the fired ball detection switch to make it undetectable, there is a problem that the fraud detection information of the “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is not transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. . In this embodiment, since the radio wave sensor 173F also detects the unauthorized radio wave transmitted to such a shot ball detection switch, the above-described inconvenience can be prevented.

  The number of times the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F are opened is counted by a counter not shown. The counting counter is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power supply even when the power supply of the P stand 2F is interrupted. And the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P stand 2F.

  Moreover, you may display the opening frequency etc. of the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F on the game ball number indicator 29F connected to the payout control part 171F. Specifically, the game ball number display 29F displays the number of times the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F are opened according to the display control signal from the payout control unit 171F.

  Main control board 16F to payout control board 17F, main chip ID (main control security chip ID), winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, symbol confirmation Number of times, jackpot information, manufacturer-specific jackpot information, etc. are transmitted.

  The main chip ID is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is information transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the table 2F is powered on. For example, in the prize opening information, the type of the prize opening includes three balls in the big prize opening 271F (see FIG. 78), and information for requesting the dispensing control board 17F to pay out 300 balls as the number of winning balls, Each of the 275F and the start winning opening 277F (see FIG. 78) includes information for entering one ball and requesting the payout control board 17F to pay out 20 balls as the number of winning balls. In addition, after a ball enters a winning port such as the normal winning port 272F and winning port information requesting the paying out of the winning ball is transmitted to the payout control board 17F, the authentication with the communication partner is disconnected due to power interruption or disconnection. In such a case, the payout control board 17F has already received the winning opening information, and the winning ball can be paid out based on the winning opening information. However, after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, etc., if a floating ball caught in a nail or the like of the game area 27F and not falling enters a winning opening such as the normal winning opening 272F, payout The control board 17F cannot receive the winning opening information and cannot pay out the winning ball. For this reason, the prize mouth information is continuously displayed so that even if the floating ball enters the prize opening such as the normal prize opening 272F after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the prize ball can be paid out. An effective period in which the payout control board 17F can receive (write to the information storage unit) is set. As a result, even if the floating ball enters the winning opening such as the normal winning opening 272F after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the payout control board 17F displays the winning opening information if it is within the valid period. It is possible to receive award balls based on floating balls. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P unit 2F is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17F performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a winning winning opening 1 or a starting winning opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which this out ball detection signal has been input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F), as will be described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 330F, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which this shot ball detection signal has been input, subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

  The security board 325F of the CU 3F and the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F are electrically connected, and a recovery request, a recovery request 2, a communication start request, Various commands such as a communication end request, a status information request, a card insertion notification, a card return notification, and a communication test request are transmitted.

  The recovery request is a command that requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. The payout control board 17F receives the recovery request and notifies the CU 3F of the recovery information of the P base 2F. The command of the recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. The communication start request is a command for requesting the P base 2F to start communication. The payout control board 17F receives the communication start request and responds to the CU3F with the communication start. The communication end request is a command for requesting the P unit 2F to end communication. The payout control board 17F receives the communication end request and returns a communication end response to the CU3F.

  The status information request is a command for requesting notification of status information to the P platform 2F. The payout control board 17F receives the status information request and notifies the CU 3F of the status information of the P platform 2F. The card insertion notification is a command for notifying the P unit 2F that a card has been inserted. The payout control board 17F receives the card insertion notification and responds to the CU3F that the card has been inserted. The card return notification is a command for notifying the P unit 2F that the card has been returned. The payout control board 17F receives a card return notification and responds to the CU3F that the card has been returned. The communication test request is a command for notifying test data to the P base 2F. The payout control board 17F receives the communication test request and returns test data to the CU 3F.

  Various responses such as a recovery response, a recovery response 2, a communication start response, a communication end response, a status information response, a card insertion response, a card return response, and a communication test response are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F.

  The front frame 5F (game frame) is provided with a launch control board 31F and a launch motor 18F. The firing control board 31F emits an excitation output to the firing motor 18F when an input signal of a touch ring (hereinafter also referred to as a touch sensor) for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input, The firing motor 18F is driven.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17F to the firing control board 31F. Upon receiving this, the firing control board 31F outputs a signal for exciting the firing motor 18F. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27F.

  A display 54F extending from the CU 3F is provided on the front surface of the P table 2F. The display 54F receives display data from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F and displays a display screen. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display 54F extending from the CU3F provided on the front surface of the P table 2F is configured to be controlled on the CU3F side, but instead, on the P table 2F side. Even if the display 54F is provided and the display control can be performed from the CU3F side, the display 54F is provided on the P base 2F side and the display control board is provided on the P base 2F side so that the display control can be performed on the P base 2F side. But you can. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54F based on a command from the payout control unit 171F.

<Notification processing of operation / non-operation information from pachinko machine>
FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a process of notifying operation / non-operation information from a pachinko machine. P base 2F shown in FIG. 80 is connected to CU 3F, hall server 801F, key management server 800F, and history management center 800AF. Here, the key management server 800F is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (hereinafter also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F. The machine history management center 800AF associates the information of the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the semiconductor provided on the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. It includes a history management system that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the chip and manages the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. The security board 325F is connected in parallel to the payout control unit 171F via the PIF circuit 326F which is a parallel interface circuit.

  When the manufacturer (gaming machine manufacturer) ships the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F and installs them in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. ) Is notified to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF includes, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F, and the security of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F. The chip ID and the security chip ID of the opponent when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are combined are included. Note that the security chip ID cannot be changed or deleted after registration in the history management center 800AF.

  On the other hand, shipment information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F shipped by the manufacturer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the shipping information is input to the machine history management center 800AF from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line or the like. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided therein, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is compared with the installed gaming machine information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. As an error notification, for example, an error notification is performed by an error notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, Error notification may be performed by the hall management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed. The information stored in association with the front chip 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID cannot be changed after the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. Further, it is desirable that the shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is registered in the machine history management center 800AF one day before installation in the hall.

  Similarly, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed in the hall is removed and stored in the warehouse, the P stand 2F becomes inactive. As shown in FIG. 80, the non-operating information is notified from the P unit 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is information that the front chip 5F of the P platform 2F and the security chip ID of the game board 26F that have been installed are not transmitted.

  On the other hand, the history information management center 800AF receives the removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F removed by the hall or warehouse company. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Further, when a second-hand trader resells the game board 26F to another hall and installs it in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F as shown in FIG. The history management center 800AF is notified. Specifically, in the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, the security chip ID of the combined front frame 5F, etc. It is included.

  On the other hand, movement information (resale information) of the game board 26F resold by the secondhand dealer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input movement information of the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in the game board 26F, and is notified from the stored information and the P base 2F. Check against game machine installation information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed by the disposal contractor are discarded, the P stand 2F is in an inoperative state, which is shown in FIG. Thus, the non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is the security chip of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) of the installed P stand 2F. This is information due to the fact that the ID is not transmitted.

  On the other hand, removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) discarded by the discarder is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on each of the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side and its transmission / reception mode. With reference to FIG. 81, main data among various data stored on the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko machine side) and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2F side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU3F side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2F side. On the other hand, the number of balls (the number of cards), the number of balls, and the card balance (balance) are managed and stored on the CU3F side.

  FIG. 81 shows the RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and the RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side. First, when the power is turned on for the first time when the P platform (pachinko machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F are electrically connected for the first time after they are installed in the game hall, the payout control board 17F on the P platform 2F side Receives the main chip ID (main control security chip ID) from the main control board 16F, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3F side, and also issues the payout chip ID ( The payout control security chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data at the time when the communication is started after the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P stand 2F side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3F side are stored on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P stand 2F as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P unit 2F side by sending new connection time data from the CU3F side when communication between the CU3F side and the P unit 2F side is started. Time data is stored on the P platform 2F side.

  Each time a command and response is transmitted between the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side, the serial number is incremented by “1”, and the serial number is stored on the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side. This serial number is a communication number for confirming whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU 3F and the P base 2F. CU3F (primary station) counts up (+1) and transmits the serial number received at the time of transmission, and P-unit 2F (secondary station) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that the CU3F does not count up the serial number at the time of retransmission, and makes no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The previous last transmission serial number is a communication number updated at the previous transmission / reception and is a number to be backed up.

  A specific mode of serial number backup in the CU 3F and the P stand 2F in this embodiment will be described. The CU 3F counts up the serial number (+1) and transmits the command to the P platform 2F. The P base 2F backup-stores the serial number of the received command as the previous last transmission serial number. Then, the P base 2F transmits a response to the received command to the CU 3F while keeping the serial number of the received command. The CU3F backs up and stores the serial number of the received response as the previous last transmission serial number. The CU 3F and the P base 2F repeat such processing every time a response from the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F.

  For example, a certain command is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the serial number n at that time is transmitted. When the response is returned from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side, the P base 2F side stores the transmitted serial number n as the last final transmission serial number and transmits the response with the serial number n as it is. On the CU3F side, the returned serial number n is stored as the last final transmission serial number. Next, when a certain command is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, the serial number is incremented (+1) and the serial number n + 1 is transmitted. When the response is returned from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side, the P base 2F side stores the transmitted serial number n + 1 as the last final transmission serial number, and transmits the response while maintaining the serial number n + 1. On the P base 2F side, since the serial number n + 1 transmitted is incremented by 1 from the serial number n of the previous last transmission serial number that has already been stored, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the response is sent to the P base 2F side. Reply to the CU3F side. On the CU3F side, the serial number n + 1 returned is incremented by 1 from the serial number n of the previous last transmission serial number that has already been stored. Therefore, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the serial number is sent the next time a command is sent. Count up (+1) and send the command of serial number n + 2 to the P platform 2F side.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2F side to the CU 3F side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM in the payout control unit 171F (see FIG. 79) on the P table 2F side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2F side to the CU 3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”.

  When a back ball is generated, the back ball is returned to the hitting ball launching position and the ball hitting operation is performed with the ball feeding to the hitting ball launching position being stopped so that all the back balls are fired into the game area. Even if a back ball is generated, the back ball may be controlled not to be counted as an additional ball. In this case, “addition balls = number of winning balls × number of winning balls”.

  For example, when a pachinko ball placed in the game area 27F wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, the adding ball to which the gaming ball is added based on the winning information The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value (added ball number) of the added ball number counter is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. Moreover, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27F, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of game balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting ball number) from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the P stand 2F side, every time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3F side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171F). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), data of the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side, this backup data includes not only the value of each counter of this time but also the value of each previous counter that has not been sent at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  In addition, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU3F side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3F side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (hereinafter also simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of stored balls, the balance, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total The number of subtracted balls (cumulative number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls held at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2F side, and the number of balls is updated. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2F side. Further, the number of cards held is added and updated based on the value of the counting ball counter transmitted from the P platform 2F. Thus, the CU3F can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2F one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball counter (hereinafter also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2F side. Yes. The CU3F updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3F stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, the hall Error notification may be performed by the management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side is replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P unit 2F side. Also good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU3F side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P unit 2F side. (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3F side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3F side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and stored on the P unit 2F side by the hall server 801F or hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the CU 3F has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 79) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU 3F (when no holding ball is present)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 79) is an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU3F when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 79) subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321F).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls for the withdrawal The number of balls to be added to the number counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side. In response to this, the P stand 2F side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  On the other hand, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image of prohibiting the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosing circulation pachinko machine in which each counter is provided.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of possessed balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. ing. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. On the CU3F side, in response to this, the number of game balls is subtracted and the number of cards held is added and updated.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P platform (pachinko machine) 2F will be described.

  FIG. 82 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information to the P base 2F. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this recovery response notifies the CU3F of recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F after the CU 3F completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F, and the CU 3F transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, and “previous final transmission count serial number”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for the recovery request, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission serial number” is the serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2F at the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the previous final transmission serial number (serial number) on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received at the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a serial number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2F and the CU3F side when the status information response is received to the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later, and the “store code” held by the P base 2F And the coincidence determination with “SC board ID” is performed, and if they coincide, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the count request ball count = 0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

  The P stand 2F refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3F, and when the CU 3F has not performed the count process for the count request, sets the count request ball count = 0 in the subtraction register. The user program executed on the P platform 2F is notified. When the counting process has been performed by the CU 3F, the count request ball number notified to the CU 3F is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match. Further, when the “store code” notified from the security board 325F and the “store code” held in the P stand 2F do not match, the user program side is notified of the store code mismatch via the register. Note that, when the P unit 2F receives a recovery request command from the CU 3F, it notifies the user program side via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2F to the CU 3F. Recovery information includes “Serial Number”, “Command”, “Last Last Sending Serial Number”, “Last Inserted Card ID”, “Previous Card Insertion Time”, “Last Last Sent Additional Serial Number”, “Unit Price”, “Game Information” It includes “presence / absence of storage”, “previous gaming machine information”, and “previous gaming information”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU3F.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. The “ball unit price” is a unit price per ball (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) played on the P platform 2F. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  “Previous game machine information” is game machine information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “game ball number”, “game ball information”, “count request ball number”, and “counting serial number”. “Number of game balls” is the number of game balls previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game ball information” is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls, the number of out-passed balls and the total number of prize balls notified to the CU 3F last time. The “count required ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU3F last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “number of game information” and “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3F last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Game information 1” is the game information 1 previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game information n” is the game information n previously notified to the CU 3F. The game information n includes, for example, type information or game prize ball information that was previously notified to the CU 3F.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU3F side and the P base 2F when the status information request is transmitted in the CU3F and when the status information request is received in the P base 2F.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P table 2F, the “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later, the “store code” held in the P table 2F, and A match with “SC board ID” is determined, and if the “store code” does not match, the recovery data is not processed. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of game information, “game information storage presence / absence” is stored: set to 0x01, the previous “game ball number”, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball number”, the previous “ The recovery data held by the P table 2F is set in the “counting serial number”, the previous “number of game information”, and the previous “game information 1 to n”. When there is no recovery data of game information or when the last transmission serial number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is set to “0x00” without storage, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball number”, the previous “0” is set in the “counting serial number” and the previous “number of game information”. However, the number of game balls notified last time is set as the number of game balls. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match.

  When it is determined that the “store code” notified from the security board 325F does not match the store code held by the P platform 2F, the card is processed as having no card. That is, ALL “0” is set for “last inserted card ID” and “previous card insertion time”.

  The P base 2F stores the serial number at the time of the status information request response as the previous last transmission serial number. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F do not match the information held by the P units, the last transmission serial number = 0 is notified. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F match the information held in the P units, the last transmitted serial number stored is notified.

  The P base 2F stores the counting sequence number as the last last transmission counting sequence number when transmitting the status information response. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the SC 325b do not match the information held in the P units, the last transmission count serial number is notified as 0. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F match the information held in the P units, the last transmitted transmission number is stored.

  In addition, when the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P unit 2F has not been performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. When the “last last transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when the recovery process cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P base 2F. For example, the display information of the P platform 2F can be displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278F. Alternatively, a display device that is controlled by the payout control unit 171F may be further provided on the P platform 2F, and information for manual correction may be displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The command of this recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the addition recovery information to the P unit 2F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “number of additional balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3F determines that the additional ball recovery process needs to be performed on the P platform 2F. The CU 3F compares the “previous last transmission addition sequence number” included in the recovery response received from the P platform 2F with the “previous final transmission addition sequence number” stored in the CU 3F. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the time of the previous connection. This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P platform 2F will be described in detail. In the recovery process of the P unit 2F, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “previous last transmission serial number” notified from the CU 3F based on the recovery request 2, the number of balls is referred to the game ball. This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F on the P platform 2F, and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result process OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result process NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, the process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When the recovery process (additional number of balls) of the P unit 2F is performed, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F, the process OK is processed as a “recovery result” to the CU3F. And the number of balls to be added notified from the CU3F is set in the addition register and notified to the user program. When the number of added balls notified from the CU3F = 0, the number of added balls = 0 is set in the addition register, notified to the user program, and the process OK is returned to the CU3F. However, if the game table state 1 responds with the game ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the state information response when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is a game ball addition request (Bit = 1), a “recovery” is sent to the CU3F. Processing NG is returned as a “result”, and the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program.

  When the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is the same as the “previous final transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P stand 2F, the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is returned as a “recovery result” to the CU 3F. If the “last last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F = 0, regardless of the number of additional balls notified from the CU3F, the number of additional balls = 0 is set in the addition register, and the user program is notified to the CU3F. The process OK is returned.

  In addition, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “previous last transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P platform 2F is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication start request command requests the P base 2F to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This communication start response is a response to the CU3F to start communication.

  The communication start request command notifies the P base 2F that communication has started normally. The P base 2F that has received the communication start request clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3F sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2F also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response of the communication start response notifies the CU 3F that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3F clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2F to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is a response to the CU3F for the communication end.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2F that the communication has ended normally, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3F that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3F and the P stand 2F stop communication and wait for restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3F to the P base 2F. The CU 3F periodically checks the state of the P stand 2F using this command. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes “serial number”, “command”, “CU state”, “additional ball number”, “additional serial number”, “counting serial number”, “ball unit price”, and “counting receipt time”. Is included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3F notified to the P base 2F, and indicates that the card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and the card is not inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state in which a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3F. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of the CU3F.

  When Bit1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the card unit opening state to P stand 2F according to the state of CU3F. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F as a count information of all the game balls it holds as a count information response.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU3F notifies the P stand 2F of “preparing for card return” for a certain period (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28F is detected, the P table 2F has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it receives a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3F by the status information response as the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit 4 notifies the P stand 2F that the receipt is completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response. When receiving the counting ball reception completion, the P stand 2F checks whether the counting sequence number is the same as that of the P stand 2F, and if it does not match, notifies the CU 3F without subtracting the number of game balls.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, card removal is waiting, and “0” indicates completion of card removal. Bit5 notifies the P stand 2F that the card is waiting to be removed from the CU 3F. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

  The “ball unit price” is a unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per game ball played on the P platform 2F. The unit price notified from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F is stored in, for example, the RAM of the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F. And P stand 2F notifies ball unit price memorized by RAM to CU3F by a status information response when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when recovery information for returning from a communication disabled state is requested from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F (recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F), the P unit 2F receives a response to the response of the recovery response. Set unit price and send to CU3F. That is, the ball unit price is not output to the outside except for notifying the CU 3F at the time of recovery response. The unit price stored in the P stand 2F is set in the response of the recovery response when the recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F, and is transmitted to the CU 3F. Thereby, it is possible to accurately grasp the unit price of the game balls that have been played on the P platform 2F before the recovery, and the player can be resumed with an appropriate game value after the recovery. Further, by not outputting the ball unit price stored in the P stand 2F to the outside other than notifying the CU 3F at the time of a recovery response, security is secured so that the ball unit price is not changed illegally. Furthermore, the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2F prohibits overwriting a new unit price when the P unit 2F holds the number of game balls. In addition, even when the P stand 2F holds the number of game balls, overwriting of the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2F is permitted and converted into a ball unit price overwritten with the number of game balls held. May be configured to update.

  The “count reception time” is information for notifying the P table 2F of the time when the CU 3F received the count request from the P table 2F, and the CU state Bit 4 (game ball count reception response) is “1” ( It is valid only when it is completed. The “count reception time” information is notified to the P platform 2F, but is processed only within the CPU of the payout control unit 171F, and stored in a RAM or the like accessible from the outside without being notified to the user program. Absent. Therefore, the information of “count reception time” is deleted in the CPU of the payout control unit 171F, so that security can be ensured.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the status information response notifies the CU 3F of the information / status of the P platform 2F. The response of the status information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information response includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “launch strength”, “game table state”, “fraud detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). “Number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3F using the “total number of ball balls”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3F checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3F matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2F.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154F (when there are multiple passing balls at the time of transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball count” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball count” transmitted from the CU 3F. Further, the CU3F adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the total prize ball number data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not add the number of game balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F and added to the number of cards held. The number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28F is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28F.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

“Launch strength” is information on the launch strength of a game ball.
The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P table 2F. It includes information on “game table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. A game is in progress (a state in which a fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball, and a game is being played in a state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operation handle 25F) is touched (a state in which the touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). If the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball firing, the P stand 2F times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. “0” indicates game ball indefinite (state where all balls are undetermined), and “1” indicates game ball definite (state where all balls are definite). Here, for example, if the P ball 2F has not been able to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball launching, it will time out and determine the game ball. Further, the P stand 2F is set in a state in which the whereabouts of the game balls are determined (game ball determination) when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3F and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. In addition, when the P platform 2F makes an addition NG response, the addition sequence number is notified without being updated. Bit 6 indicates a pressed state of the firing stop switch. When “0”, the switch is released, and when “1”, the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit 3 indicates that the game state information is changing, and “1” is set during the change. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code occurring in the P table 2F, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When it is “0”, only an alarm is issued, and when it is “1”, it indicates an alarm + output to the hall server 801F.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P stand 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 4” is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition sequence number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit 5 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates that when “1”, the card unit to which the P unit 2F was connected in the past was the development CU3FD (development CU connection). Bit 6 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that the card unit to which the P stand 2F was connected in the past when “1” is the game board development jig 3E (game board development jig connection). . Bit 7 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that the gaming machine connected when “1” is a gaming machine simulator (gaming machine simulator connection). Bit1 to Bit4 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. In the case of a mismatch, it is assumed that the game balls of other stores are mixed in the game balls, and Bit 0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to the CU 3F.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P device 2F. The “game information number”, “type information 1” to “type information n” , “Count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “Number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is a winning opening, “4” is the number of symbol stops, “5” is a big hit, and “6” is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of “5”, the data number is “1”, the ball is large, “2” is the ball is small, “3” is the ball, “4” to “6” It is a spare time. Further, when the data type is a small hit of “6”, the data number is a small hit when “1”, and a spare when “2” to “15”.

  “Count information 1” to “Count information n” indicate game count information 1 to game count information n, respectively.

  Here, when the data type is a start opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, the count information is information on the number of winning balls from Bit 4 to Bit 7, and the winning ball at the time of winning for each type information of game information. The numbers indicate the number of award balls when “1” to “15”. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are information on the number of wins, which indicates the number of wins (cumulative) for each type of game table information, and each of the numbers “1” to “15” represents data on the number of wins. In the count information, when the data type is the symbol stop count, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop count, and when “1” to “15”, the symbol stop count Represents. In the count information, when the data type is big hit or small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and when “1” to “15”, the number of hits is shown. It represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is the detection result of the fire strength sensor 19 described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “changing signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 </ b> F is fluctuating as the pachinko ball passes through any of the start winning holes 275, 276, and 277.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response to the card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU 3F.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2F when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Card ID” is identification ID information of an IC card inserted into the CU 3F, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309F (see FIG. 1) of the CU3F. The year information is 2 digits YY, the month information is 2 digits MM, and the day information is 2 digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held on the P platform 2F is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been moved to the store. The CU3F stores a store code where the CU3F is installed. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time. The “store code” and “SC board ID” are not notified to the user program side and are deleted in the payout control circuit.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3F that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, a card or general card is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F of CU3F, or a card is notified to the P stand 2F as a card insertion notification by depositing a general 0 yen 0 coin card. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P table 2F backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a status information request including information on the status of the CU 3F being inserted into the card (Bit 0 = 1 in the CU status) is received (determined that the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F) ), The P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. When the card return button 322F of the CU 3F is pressed, a card return notification is made to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F clears information such as the backed up card ID and card insertion time. The condition for canceling the card insertion state is when the P stand 2F receives the card return notification command.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of the card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU3F.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P platform 2F of the card return, and the CU 3F transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that the CU3F does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the currently inserted card or there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU3F is used to insert a member card, a general card, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2F backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3F at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2F clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of a communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to the CU3F.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2F is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the P base 2F and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU3F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU3F is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3F, and is arbitrary data.

<< 17. Count history request, 18. Counting history response >>
A count history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This count history request command is for requesting a count history to the P base 2F. In response to this counting history request, a response to the counting history response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response to the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU3F.

  The count history request command requests a count history from the P base 2F, and the CU 3F transmits it to the P base 2F in the count history sequence after the authentication sequence. The count history request includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “store code”, and “SC board ID”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F.

  A process for detecting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID will be described. The SC board ID includes an identification code and a shipping manufacturer code. The P units recognize connected units (commercial CU3F, development unit, etc.) by detecting the shipping manufacturer code included in the SC board ID.

  Specifically, a description will be given of a case where the P platform detects whether a unit to be connected is a development unit or a game board development jig. When the game history when these development units and game board development jigs not used for commercial use are connected to the unit (CU3F) used for commercial use after that, the game balls given during development This causes a problem that allows a game to be played during commercial use. Therefore, in order to avoid the problem, the P stand 2F detects whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, and stores the result in the recovery register.

  In order to detect whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, the P base 2F, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before the count history request, and the count history request The shipping manufacturer code of the later SC board ID is compared. First, if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “None”, the development unit or the game board development jig is detected regardless of the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request. do not do. Even if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request matches the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request, it is not detected as a development unit or a game board development jig.

  However, when the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history and the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history match the upper byte, but the lower byte is different, it is detected as a development unit. Also, the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code other than the game board development jig Also detected as a development unit. If the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code of the game board development jig, the game board Detect with development jig.

  The P stand 2F stores the detection that the development unit is connected by setting Bit 4 of the recovery register to “1”, and the detection that the game board development jig is connected is the recovery register. This bit is memorized by setting Bit 5 to “1”.

  If the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “none”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is a unit newly connected after the recovery process is performed. The shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID is overwritten. When the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “present”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is subjected to the recovery process if there is no game ball to be recovered. After that, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit is overwritten. However, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is the same as the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit after the recovery process if there is a game ball to be recovered. Prohibit overwriting. It should be noted that the prohibition state of overwriting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID is canceled by clearing the RAM of the P unit 2F (particularly clearing the number of game balls). By prohibiting the overwriting of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID when there are game balls, the number of game balls given by the development unit is recovered as the number of game balls that can be played by the connected commercial unit thereafter. This can be prevented.

  The response of the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU 3F, and the P unit 2F receives the counting history request command and transmits the counting history information stored in the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. . The count history response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “count history result”, “count history 1”, and “count history 2”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Counting history result” is information indicating whether or not the counting history is stored in the P table 2F by the counting history process in the P table 2F. Here, the counting history is a history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU3F side as the number of counting request balls from the P table 2F side during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. “Card ID”, “Counting receipt time” included when receiving a count receipt response (count response ON) from the CU3F, and the cumulative number of count balls dispensed up to the count request OFF state “cumulative count balls” It also includes information on “number”. Note that the P platform 2F holds the history of the past two times (the history of the number of game balls in the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state is one time).

  In the count history result, “0x00” indicates that there is no history, “0x01” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 1), and “0x02” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 2).

  “Counting history 1” is the most recent history (final counting) of the past two histories, and includes information on “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number”. Is included. “Card ID” is identification information of the card inserted into the CU 3F at the time of counting request. The “count reception time” is the time when the CU 3F receives the number of game balls requested to be counted from the P stand 2F. The “cumulative counting ball number” is the cumulative number of counting balls counted during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls held on the P stand 2F at the end of counting.

  “Counting history 2” is an old history (counting immediately before the last counting) of the past two times, and includes “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball”. Contains number information. The information of “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number” is the same type of information as included in “counting history 1”, and detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  Next, conditions for outputting the count history data held by the P platform 2F to the CU 3F will be described. When the P store 2F matches the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the “store code” and “SC board ID” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3F in the counting history sequence, The “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” are included in the response of the counting history response and output to the CU 3F. Further, if the “store code” stored in the count history request command received from the CU 3F matches the “store code” stored in the P table 2F, even if the “SC board ID” is different, the count history response Including “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response to the CU3F. This takes into account changing the combination of P stand 2F and CU 3F in the store, and if it is in the same store, it is disadvantageous even if the counting history data stored in P stand 2F is transferred to another CU 3F Is not given.

  However, if the “store code” stored in the “store code” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3F is different from the “store code” stored in the P table 2F, It is prohibited to include the “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response of the response to output to the CU 3F. Even if the same CU3F is moved to another store, even if it is connected to the P stand 2F holding the same “SC board ID”, if the counting history data is taken over, it is disadvantageous to the other store. It is because there is a possibility of giving.

  Of course, the P base 2F outputs the counting history data stored in the P base 2F when not connected to the CU3F but connected to the game board development jig or the development unit, or when not connected to any unit. There is no. By restricting the output of the counting history data, the security of the game machine including the P machine 2F and the P machine 2F is enhanced.

<Main sequences processed between CU and P>
Next, based on FIG. 83 to FIG. 92, processing is performed between the CU 3F and the P base 2F by processing executed by the CPU mounted on the CU control unit 323F and the CPU mounted on the payout control board 17F. The main sequence will be described.

<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3F and the P base 2F will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU3F (primary station) to the P station 2F (secondary station), and the P station 2F returns a response to the CU3F in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3F is the primary station and the P stand 2F is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P stand 2F from the CU 3F to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted at intervals of 200 ms between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25F, the P platform 2F hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27F per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2F can notify the CU 3F of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P base 2F. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3F side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3F transmits the command to the P base 2F, the same command is transmitted to the P base 2F again. Further, if no response is received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The same command is retransmitted up to 14 times on the P platform 2F. If a response is not received from the P platform 2F even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3F determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication cut off”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3F is disconnected from the connector of the P base 2F, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2F is cut off. The CU3F does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2F side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F returns a response to the CU 3F in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3F is not transmitted to the P stand 2F continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2F determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18F, and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the CU3F connector and the P-base 2F connector, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of the CU3F.

  The command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2F side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication. Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 83 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU3F is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the P base 2F stops the firing motor 18F to stop the game, and then starts communication. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 19 is started, and when a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P base 2F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the last last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2F, and requests recovery information from the P unit 2F. The P base 2F refers to the previous last transmission count serial number notified from the CU 3F and executes the count recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2F refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3F has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3F has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  In the CU3F that has received the recovery response, if the previous last transmission addition serial number process included in the recovery information has not been executed, the CU3F additional recovery process is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F and transmits recovery data to the P unit 2F. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P base 2F executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU3F counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2F receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3F has retransmitted the command. The CU 3F transmits a command, and backs up the sequence number when a response with the same sequence number is notified from the P unit 2F. When transmitting a response corresponding to the received command, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the received serial number as it is. The P base 2F backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request command to the P platform 2F with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2F returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3F as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F with a serial number “2”. The P platform 2F returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3F as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2F clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  The CU 3F counts up the serial number to “4” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F. The status information request command includes information on the unit price of the balls. By transmitting the ball unit price to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F can recognize whether the game ball is playing at 4 yen per ball or whether the game is played at 1 yen per ball. . In addition, since the status information request command is transmitted in a cycle of 200 ms as described above, it is possible to transmit information on the unit price of the ball up to three times to the P stand 2F during the cycle of 600 ms that the game ball is fired. is there. Therefore, it is possible to change the unit price for each game ball played on the P platform 2F. If the unit price can be managed for each game ball in a small number (for example, one ball unit), the player's request (for example, a desire to play a game slowly with a small amount, or the remaining number of game balls in a short time) It is possible to provide a variety of games tailored to the demand for consumption. The command of the status information request transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F described below includes the ball unit price information, but is not specified when the information of the unit price is not directly related to the content of the sequence to be described. In response to this, the P table 2F updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2F returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “4”. The response of the status information response does not include information on the unit price of the ball. This prevents illegally changing the information of the ball unit price currently being played on the P stand 2F and sending it to the CU 3F and illegally managing the ball unit price of the game ball managed by the CU 3F. . Thereby, the security of the game system can be improved.

  In response to this, the CU3F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU3F counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends the response of the status information response to the CU3F with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3F shown in FIG. 84 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card return ready state = OFF to the P base 2F before card insertion. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n and game prohibition to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, in the CU3F, when a card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information (card ID or the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in the CU3F.

  The CU3F is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the midst of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the hall server 801F, for example, holding balls, storage balls, and the remaining amount of the card. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312F and displaying on the display 54F on the P platform 2F side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312F, the status information request including the serial number = n + 1 and the card return ready state = OFF. Is sent to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU 3F. The display 54F on the P platform 2F side is controlled by the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F to display that the card is being inquired.

  After that, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3F stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2F. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325F. In response to this, the P unit 2F backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F, and a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3F. Also in CU3F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of CU control unit 323F.

  In response to this, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F, thereby notifying the P unit 2F that the card is being inserted. . The P unit 2F receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3F. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F. The P unit 2F responds with a status information response including a serial number = n + 4 and a game permission. Is returned to CU3F.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + x, a card ID, a card insertion time, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P unit 2F. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2F. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  In response to this, the P table 2F does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3F without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3F does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, the card ID is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F during the card insertion, and the illegal action such as falsification of the card ID stored in the P base 2F can be prevented, and security is improved. Can do.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing processing at the time of insertion performed by the CU 3F when a card is inserted into the CU 3F. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 85, CU3F performs each step of S1-S7. Further, S8 to S10 and S12 to S15 are executed by the P stand 2F. More specifically, the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13, and S15 is executed by an effect control board provided on the P base 2F, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is provided with an effect control unit. The effect control board transmits to the payout control unit 171F, and the payout control unit 171F transmits to the CU3F.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupt operation has been performed and a game interruption sequence has been executed. If it is suspended, it is determined in S2 whether or not the C-ID and type of the inserted card matches the C-ID and type of the suspended card. If not, the process proceeds to S5. The inserted card is ejected and a transition is made to standby. In FIG. 85, the “type” is not shown.

  On the other hand, if the C-ID and type of the inserted card and the C-ID and type of the interrupted card match, the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine and starts the game. Therefore, the control advances to S4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game is executed in S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, it is determined in S3a whether or not a card is already inserted. Whether or not the card is being inserted is determined based on whether or not the card reader provided in the card insertion / discharge port 309F accepts the card. If it is determined in S3a that the card is not being inserted, the process of storing the C-ID and type of the inserted card and transmitting it to the P table 2F is performed in S3. In the P stand 2F, the C-ID and type are received, and the received C-ID and type and the C-ID and type stored in the backup area (for example, a backup data storage unit provided on the production control board). Are compared (S8). Then, in S9, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match. If they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing ends. .

  If it is determined in S3a that the card is being inserted, in order to prevent the C-ID and type different from the C-ID and type of the card being inserted from being overwritten and stored in the CU3F or P stand 2F, S3 Skip processing in.

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (S8, S9) for performing the same determination processing are used. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the same determination processing function on the communication means side (the payout control part 171F side), and the display control means is sufficient. A common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the game machine and the game machine having no display control means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S15 and S7 as control content of a modification. Through S15, the game history data, C-ID, and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to CU3F and then deleted. The CU3F receives it and transmits the received data to the hall server (upper server) 801. The hall server 801F backs up the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that they match in S9, the process proceeds to S12, in which the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (for example, the backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board), The addition update of the game history data is newly started from the data.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S10, S13, and S14 as a control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data, the game history data, the C-ID, and the type in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted in S13. Further, after S12, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU in S14. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of S10, S13, S14 and the processes of S15, S7.

  The conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and insertion time will be described in more detail. As described above, the card ID and the insertion time are prohibited from being updated during card insertion. As a prohibiting condition, the relationship between the card insertion notification command and the CU status included in the status information request command will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 86 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship between a card insertion notification command, a CU state included in a state information request command, and a card insertion state.

  First, FIG. 86 (a) shows an example in which the CU state included in the status information request command is in the card insertion state (Bit0 = "1") before the card unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command. ing. The state (1) shown in FIG. 86 (a) is a card insertion waiting state, and the card unit notifying command is not received by the P base 2F, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. Is when the card is not being inserted (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, the state (2) shown in FIG. 86 (a) is a card insertion preparation state, and the card insertion notification command is not received by the P base 2F, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state to be inserted is card insertion (Bit0 = "1"). Also in this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) shown in FIG. 86 (a) is a card insertion state, and the P unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card. This is the case during insertion (Bit 0 = “1”). In this case, the P base 2F is prohibited from overwriting the card ID and the insertion time because the CU 3F is inserting the card.

  Next, the state (4) shown in FIG. 86 (a) is a card return preparation state, and the P table 2F has not received the card return notification command, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state to be displayed is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, overwriting of the card ID and the insertion time is prohibited in the P base 2F on the assumption that the CU 3F has not yet returned the card and the card is being inserted. The state (5) shown in FIG. 86 (a) is a card return state. When the P table 2F receives a card return notification command, the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card insertion. This is the case (Bit 0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  FIG. 86 (b) shows an example in which the CU state included in the status information request command becomes the card insertion status (Bit0 = “1”) after the P unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command. The state (1) ′ shown in FIG. 86 (b) is a card insertion waiting state, and the card unit notification command is not received by the P base 2F, and the CU included in the status information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the card is not being inserted (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, the state (2) ′ shown in FIG. 86 (b) is a card insertion preparation state, and the card unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). Also in this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) ′ shown in FIG. 86 (b) is a state during card insertion. When the P unit 2F receives a card insertion notification command, the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F This is the case when the card is being inserted (Bit0 = "1"). In this case, the P base 2F is prohibited from overwriting the card ID and the insertion time because the CU 3F is inserting the card.

  Next, the state (4) ′ shown in FIG. 86 (b) is a card return preparation state, and the P table 2F has not received the card return notification command, but the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F This is a case where the included CU state is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, overwriting of the card ID and insertion time is prohibited for the P base 2F on the assumption that the card is being inserted because the CU 3F has not yet returned the card. The state (5) ′ shown in FIG. 86 (b) is a card return state, and the card unit 2F receives the card return notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card. This is a case where no insertion is in progress (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  In this way, by limiting the conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and insertion time, the card ID or the like is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F, and the card ID stored in the P base 2F is falsified. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as doing and improve security.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence processing shown in FIG. 87, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321F is pressed, the CU 3F confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54F displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3F makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3F counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Since the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 5, the number of additional balls = 175, and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 91, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  After that, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3F determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the holding balls or the storage balls is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the operation of pressing the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3F notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2F after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, the CU 3F displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P platform 2F. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU 3F. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 2, an additional ball number = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 89 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return ready state transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  Further, in FIG. 89, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3F, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 2F. In response to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3F, the same counting sequence number m is returned from the P stand 2F. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28F. In FIG. 89, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button 28F once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3F. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F.

  When the operation of the count button 28F is detected, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350F. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350F controls the display 54F on the P platform 2F side. As a result, the display 54F displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 2, a count serial number m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the count request state of the P base 2F is OFF, since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2F transmits a second count request to the CU 3F. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3F. However, even at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the ball | bowl equivalent to the number of count balls requested | required, and updates the display of a ball | bowl to 200. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2F that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3F. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  CU3F which received this status information response determines with completion of counting. Although not shown, the CU 3F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< Counting history processing >>
Next, processing of count history data stored in the P platform 2F will be described. FIG. 90 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing of count history data stored in the P platform 2F. In FIG. 90, the initial number of game balls is 600. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n (not shown), a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In the P platform 2F, the player operates the counting button 28F from the response of the status information response transmitted before receiving the status information request command until the response to the status information request command is transmitted. The counting process is started.

  Then, in the P stand 2F, the response of the status information response including the serial number = n (not shown), the number of game balls = 600, the counting serial number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 100 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU 3F. Here, in the P platform 2F, the counting request is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, so the counting history processing is started. Specifically, the P stand 2F uses the history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU 3F side as the count request ball number from the P stand 2F side between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state as a count history for one time. Remember. That is, when there are a plurality of count requests, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the first count request as the first count request. Thereafter, as the second count request, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the second count history. Although depending on the period during which the count button 28F is pressed, a response to a status information response including a plurality of count request ON states is received between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state. It is returned to CU3F. The count history to be stored includes the “card ID” at the time of the count request, the “count reception time” included in the status information response of the count response ON state from the CU3F, and the number of balls that have been paid out until the count request is OFF. The information includes the cumulative number “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball number” at the end of counting.

  Next, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P-unit 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counted balls = 100, and the number of game balls is collated, and if it is 500 balls, the temporarily fixed 100 balls are confirmed. . Then, the display on the game ball number display 29F is updated from 600 to 500. Further, when the player continues to operate the counting button 28F, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number = m + 2, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request. A response of a status information response including = ON is returned to the CU3F. Next, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 2 and a count response = ON to the P unit 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and the number of game balls is collated, and if it is 400 balls, the temporarily fixed 100 balls are fixed. . Then, the display on the game ball number display 29F is updated from 600 to 500. After that, when the operation of the counting button 28F by the player is finished, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), the number of game balls = 400, the counting serial number = m + 3, the number of counting balls = 100 and the counting request. = Response of status information response including OFF is returned to CU3F. When the P stand 2F is changed to the counting request OFF state, the counting history stores 100 balls + 100 balls = 200 balls as the counting history 1 as the “cumulative counting ball number”. Further, the P stand 2F stores the number of game balls when changed to the count request OFF state in the counting history 1 as the “number of game balls” at the end of counting. Further, the P base 2F stores the “count reception time” included in the state information response of the count response ON state from the CU 3F in the count history 1. When a new history is stored in the counting history 1, if the counting history 1 already exists, the counting history 1 is stored as the counting history 2 and then the new history is stored in the counting history 1. . In addition, since the history for the past two times is stored in the P platform 2F, it is stored as the counting history 1 and the counting history 2, but even if the history for the past one time or the history for the past three times or more is stored. Good.

  As described above, it is possible to recover the number of game balls counted by storing the counting history, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the recovery processing by storing a plurality of past pieces.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 91 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 91, the number of cards held by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of gaming balls is 800. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, when the player presses the “return card” button, the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls, and the CU 3F determines that the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is not zero. Further, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU3F sets the card return ready state = ON, and the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. Note that the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2F determines that the counting operation for pressing the counting button 28F is a counting operation with the card return ready state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU3F of a counting acceptance number of 800 balls, and a counting acceptance number request for 800 gaming balls, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, a gaming ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a count request message, the P unit 2F counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the counted number of 800 balls to the number of held balls, and subtracts the counted number of 800 balls from the gaming ball number of 800 balls to 0 balls. Further, the CU3F backs up the updated data of the last transmission count sequence number last time. Then, in order to notify the receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3F sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU store opening state = ON, card return ready state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F subtracts the counting ball number 800 from the gaming ball number 800 and displays the gaming ball number 0 on the display 54F or the like. Further, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F that the number of game balls is 0 and counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to the CU3F. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  The CU3F counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28F and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17F, and the card insertion time to the CU 3F. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3F, the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3F performs a match determination between the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P stand 2F, and if it matches, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player starts the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in the CU3F Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU3F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3F can be removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309F (card removal possible state). The CU 3F has a sensor that can determine whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / ejecting port 309F. If the sensor signal is in the ON state, the CU 3F is determined to be in the card removal possible state. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  When the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2F displays “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. Moreover, in order to notify the card removal, the P base 2F may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” with a speaker. Further, the P stand 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 4, a game ball number = 0, a count serial number = m + 1, a count ball number = 0, and a count response = OFF to the CU 3F. The CU3F not only notifies the P stand 2F that the card can be removed, but also a hall computer that is a device connected to the CU 3F or the P stand 2F, a call lamp mounted on the P stand 2F. The device may be notified that the card can be removed. Thereby, it is possible to further prevent the user from forgetting to remove the card (removal of the recording medium) by notifying other than the CU 3F and the P stand 2F that the card can be removed.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is in an ON state, the CU 3F transmits a command for requesting a state information including “Waiting for card removal = ON” to the P base 2F. However, when the player removes the card from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is turned off, so that the CU3F is waiting for the serial number = n + 5 and the card removal = OFF A command for requesting the status information including is transmitted to the P base 2F.

  In response to this, the P base 2F stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278F, and terminates the card removal notification. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Further, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3F.

  The sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 91 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. In FIG. 92, in particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information request has not arrived (from CU3F to the P base 2F). FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process in a case where a command has not arrived) and communication partners after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 92, before the power interruption occurs during the game, CU 3F transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F sends a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3 and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3F in order to notify the CU 3F of the game table information. To do. The P table 2F updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3F receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2F during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. Thereafter, since the status information response from the P stand 2F is not transmitted, the CU 3F performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F until the power is cut off, the game is continued in the P table 2F and the game table information is changed, the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P base 2F is restored, and the P base 2F starts to operate. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 93 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, whether or not the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Determine whether. If they match, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU 3F. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU3F side based on the game information to be played. Therefore, in this case, the P stand 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1, ball unit price) to the CU 3F as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game stand information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the CU3F has not reached the CU3F, in such a case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game table information A recovery response (sequence number = 1, ball unit price) including game information is returned to the CU3F. The P stand 2F transmits the response of the recovery response including the unit price when transmitting the response to the CU 3F, and transmits the unit price of the game ball played before the recovery process to the CU 3F. As a result, the game can be played after the recovery process at the unit price of the game balls played before the recovery process. The ball unit price information is also included in the response of the recovery response transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F, which will be described later, but is not specified in particular when the ball unit price information is not directly related to the contents of the sequence to be described.

  In FIG. 92, CU3F does not store the game information included in the recovery response, and therefore does not perform the addition recovery process. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. Since no game information is stored, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Upon receiving this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process.

<< Counting history sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a process for reading the count history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of processing for reading the count history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. First, the CU 3F transmits a count history request command including a serial number = n, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P platform 2F. The P stand 2F compares the store code transmitted from the CU 3F with the card insertion notification command and stored with the store code transmitted from the CU 3F with the count history request command. When the store code matches with the comparison result, the P table 2F sets the stored count history 1 and count history 2 data to the response of the count history response so that it can be transmitted to the CU 3F. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the counting history response including the serial number = n, the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the CU 3F.

  On the other hand, if the store code does not match as a result of the comparison, the P platform 2F sets data as no counting history in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU3F. Although not shown, the P base 2F returns a response of a counting history response including a serial number = n and no counting history to the CU 3F.

  Thus, the counting history sequence can recover the number of game balls counted by transmitting the counting history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F, and can further recover a plurality of past (counting history 1 and counting history). By transmitting 2) to CU3F, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved. Note that the plurality of count histories transmitted to the CU3F is not limited to two times, and may be three or more count histories.

<Management of gaming machines>
Next, a system for managing the history of gaming machines from shipment to disposal will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining a flow of history information (machine history information) from shipment to disposal of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the target of the gaming machine that manages the history is not limited to the above-described enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P 2F), and includes a conventional CR gaming machine. Of course, the target gaming machine includes not only pachinko gaming machines but also S machines (slot machines) 2SF corresponding to P machines 2F described later, conventional pachislot machines, and the like.

  Referring to FIG. 94, when a gaming machine is shipped from a gaming machine maker to Hall A, the gaming machine manufacturer's server (not shown) sends shipping information about the shipped gaming machine to a communication line. The information is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input shipping information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram showing details of a flow until shipping information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 95, when ordering a gaming machine from a gaming machine manufacturer, Hall A sends a sales contract to the gaming machine manufacturer. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives the sales contract sent from Hall A, it confirms the order of the gaming machine according to the sales contract. When the gaming machine manufacturer confirms the order, it sends a copy of the warranty card and the certification notice to Hall A and starts production of the gaming machine. The gaming machine manufacturer ships the produced gaming machine to Hall A from the gaming machine manufacturer (delivered to Hall A). In addition, after a gaming machine to be shipped to Hall A is delivered to a carrier, the gaming machine manufacturer's server inputs shipping information regarding the gaming machine to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the shipping information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of the shipping information. Specifically, FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing items registered as shipping information. FIG. 96B is a diagram showing registration classifications included in the registration type.

  Referring to FIG. 96 (a), shipping information includes registration type, game board manufacturing number, main board management number, main control chip ID number (main chip ID), main control product code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a payout control chip ID number (payout chip ID), a payout control product code, a shipping date, a company code, a hall code, and a cancellation flag.

  The registration type indicates whether the gaming machine to be shipped is a conventional CR gaming machine, an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P stand 2F), a gaming board with a replaced part, or a gaming machine frame. This is information to specify. Specifically, in FIG. 96 (b), when the registration type number is “11” to “14”, the gaming machine to be shipped is a CR gaming machine, and when “21” to “25”. Indicates that the gaming machine to be shipped is P 2F. Furthermore, the registration type numbers “11” to “14” indicate that the game board, the gaming machine frame, the gaming board + the gaming machine frame, and the gaming board (parts replacement) are replaced. Also, the registration type numbers “21” to “25” indicate that they are replaced gaming boards, gaming machine frames, gaming boards + gaming machine frames, gaming board parts, gaming machine frame parts, respectively. When replacing the board of the game board or the board of the gaming machine frame, the board management number after replacement is set and registered when the base is replaced. In addition, replacement of parts in which the production numbers of the game board and the gaming machine frame are changed is registered as a new shipment. Note that the name of the gaming machine manufacturer and the model name of the gaming machine are specified by the registration type.

The game board production number and main board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code.
The main control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine). The main control product code is the product code of the main control chip (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine).

  The gaming machine frame manufacturing number and the payout board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code. Note that the payout board management number does not need to be set in a conventional CR gaming machine.

  The payout control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine). The payout control product code is a product code written in the payout control chip (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine).

  The shipment date is the date when the gaming machine is shipped, and is the date when shipment is confirmed. The business operator code is information for specifying the name of the carrier. The hole code is information for identifying the hall name of the delivery destination. The cancellation flag is set to “0” when shipping information is registered, and “1” when canceling registered shipping information. When the gaming machine manufacturer has registered incorrect shipping information in the machine history management center 800AF, the gaming machine manufacturer sets a cancellation flag for the incorrect shipping information to “1” and registers it again in the machine history management center 800AF.

  When the history management center 800AF receives the shipping information with the cancellation flag set to “1”, the history management center 800AF cancels the registration of the shipping information with the same content as the received shipping information and the cancellation flag set to “0”. That is, the shipping information having the same content as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” is deleted from the storage area of the history management center 800AF. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state).

  Further, the machine history management center 800AF can accept the shipment information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the shipping information having the same contents as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” cannot be registered in the history management center 800AF.

  Here, examples of the predetermined condition include time and period. Therefore, the machine history management center 800AF can be set to accept the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until 8:00 pm on the day when the shipping information to be canceled is registered. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state), and after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after 8:00 pm on the registration date) ) Can be prevented from tampering with shipping information.

  If the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F), the main control chip ID number or the payout control chip ID number serves as identification information for identifying the individual gaming machine, and the gaming machine has a conventional CR In the case of a gaming machine, at least one number of a gaming board manufacturing number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame manufacturing number, and a payout board management number is identification information for identifying an individual gaming machine.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), the shipping information is made the same format regardless of whether the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F) or a conventional CR gaming machine. In the management center 800AF, the history of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F) and the conventional CR gaming machine can be managed in a unified manner.

  Referring to FIG. 94 again, when a gaming machine is delivered to hall A from a gaming machine manufacturer and the gaming machine is installed in hall A, a server (not shown) in hall A is connected via a communication line. Installation information regarding the installed gaming machine is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the input installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing details of a flow until installation information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer (not shown) installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. . In FIG. 97 (a), the conventional CR gaming machine is mainly used, and the conventional CR gaming machine is installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line. The case is assumed.

  FIG. 97 (b) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 97 (b), this is mainly the case of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F), and the P stand 2F is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line. Is assumed.

  Referring to FIG. 97 (a), when a gaming machine is delivered to hall A from the gaming machine manufacturer, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a copy of the gaming machine delivery form, the gaming machine installation information is input from the gaming machine manufacturer to the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line, and the input installation information is stored in the storage area of the server. be registered. When installation information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF, the registration result is output via a communication line or as a document. In Hall A, when a jurisdiction implementation inspection is conducted and a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A.

  Referring to FIG. 97 (b), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to Hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from Hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. Thereafter, in Hall A, a jurisdiction implementation inspection is performed, and when a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A. Since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be connectable via a communication line, when the gaming machine installed in the hall A is turned on, the history is automatically transferred from the hall computer. Installation information is transmitted to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the received installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the installation information input to the history management center 800AF in FIG. 97 (a). Referring to FIG. 98, the installation information includes a registration type, a game board production number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame production number, an installation date, a hall code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, hole code, and cancellation flag are the same as those described in FIG. 96, detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 97 (a), it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A. Therefore, the registration type numbers are “11” to “14”. Become. The installation date is, for example, the planned opening date of the warranty card.

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 97 (a), the machine history management center 800AF has the gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, gaming board production number, main board management number, as installation information input from the gaming machine manufacturer. A game frame serial number, installation date, and installation hall name are registered.

  In the case of FIG. 97 (b), the machine history management center 800AF receives the machine manufacturer name, model name, installation date, installation destination hall name, as installation information automatically transmitted from the hall computer. The main control chip ID and the payout control ID are registered. The history management center 800AF may receive the above-mentioned part of information as installation information, and register information that is common with the shipping information with reference to the shipping information.

  Referring again to FIG. 94, when the gaming machine installed in hall A is removed, the removal information from hall A is written in a document or the like, and the document is sent to history management center 800AF. Based on the removal information sent to the machine history management center 800AF, the removal information is registered in the storage area of the server by inputting necessary information from the input means (terminal not shown) of the machine history management center 800AF. If the document is not sent to the machine history management center 800AF, it is determined that the gaming machine has been removed from the hall A when second-hand movement information or disposal information described later is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. The removal information may be registered.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flow until removal information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 99A is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. In FIG. 99 (a), it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line.

  FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 99 (b), it is assumed that the P unit 2F is mainly installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line.

  Referring to FIG. 99 (a), when the gaming machine installed in Hall A is removed, the gaming machine is removed based on the issued change approval application. When the gaming machine is removed, a document including removal information is sent from the hall A to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the removal information in the storage area based on the sent document.

  99B, since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable, the history management center 800AF is based on the installation information registered in the storage area. If a certain period of time (for example, one month) has passed and no communication with the gaming machine that should have been installed in Hall A, it is determined that the gaming machine has not been operated and has been removed. Then, the removal information is registered in the storage area. Similar to FIG. 99A, the history management center 800AF may register the removal information in the storage area based on the document sent from the hall A.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is to be removed, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a game board production number, a main board management number, a game frame production number, a removal date, and removal as removal information. The hall name is registered. In addition, when the P stand 2F is removed, in the machine history management center 800AF, a removal control board management number is further registered as removal information in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine. Is done.

  Referring to FIG. 94 again, when the gaming machine removed from hall A is received in the seller's warehouse and the received gaming machine is delivered to another hall B, the seller will enter the application document. The used movement information is entered and sent to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers second-hand movement information in the server from the input means of the machine history management center 800AF based on the sent application documents. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer owned by the dealer are configured to be communicable, the management computer inputs the used movement information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Also good.

  When the gaming machine delivered from the dealer is delivered to another hall B and the gaming machine is installed in another hall B, the installation is performed in the other hall B as shown in FIG. Information is registered in the server of the machine history management center 800AF. Also, when the gaming machine installed in Hall B is removed, the removal information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF according to the flow described with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is collected by the processing company and the collected gaming machine is discarded, the disposal information is entered in the application document from the processing company, and the document is recorded. It is sent to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the discard information in the storage area by inputting necessary information from the input means in the own device. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer of the processing company are configured to be communicable, the management computer can input the discard information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Good.

  Further, when the gaming machine traded in from the hall A by the gaming machine maker is discarded, the hall computer inputs the discard information regarding the gaming machine to be discarded via the communication line to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input discard information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a flow until discard information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 100, when a gaming machine manufacturer gives a notice of acceptance of trade-in of a gaming machine to hall A, the gaming machine is delivered from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When a gaming machine maker collects and stores the gaming machine and then discards it, it requests the disposal company (disposal company) to dispose of it. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a notification from the processing company that the disposal of the gaming machine has been completed (processing details, etc.), the gaming machine manufacturer's server sends the disposal information about the gaming machine via the communication line. Input to the management center 800AF. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the discard information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the discard information input to the machine history management center 800AF.

  Referring to FIG. 101, the discard information includes registration type, discard date, game board manufacturer code, game board manufacture number, main board management number, gaming machine frame manufacturer code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a company code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, and cancellation flag are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 96, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The discard date is the date when the gaming machine is discarded. The game board manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the game board. The gaming machine frame manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the gaming machine frame. The business operator code is information for identifying the business operator that has performed the disposal process. Typically, it is the operator code of the processing company (disposal company), but when it is discarded by the gaming machine manufacturer, it becomes the operator code of the gaming machine manufacturer.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is discarded, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a gaming board production number, a main board management number, a gaming frame production number, a disposal date, and processing as disposal information. The trader name is registered. In addition, when the P unit 2F is discarded, in the machine history management center 800AF, in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine, a payout control board management number is further registered as discard information. Is done.

<Management of front frame and game board>
In the machine history management center described above, the configuration for managing the history of the gaming machine (P machine 2F) has been described. However, since the P machine 2F is formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, the front frame 5F and the game It is also possible to manage the history separately for the board 26F. Therefore, machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be described below.

  FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram for explaining history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F according to the present embodiment. The history management center 800AF shown in FIG. 102 associates information on the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. The information of the game board 26F is stored in the table shown in FIG. 103 in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in FIG. 103, and the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is managed. The history management center 800AF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 8001F as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 8002F that stores operation programs and control data of the CPU 8001F, and a RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU 8001F. A (Random Access Memory) 8003F, an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 8004F, and a mass storage device 8005F such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) are provided.

  FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram of a table that stores information on the front frame 5F and information on the game board 26F in order to manage the machine history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. In the table shown in FIG. 103, a payout side table (FIG. 103 (a)) that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the payout control board 17F, and a security chip ID of the main control board 16F. A main control side table (FIG. 103 (b)) for storing information on the game board 26F is included.

  Hereinafter, the machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. First, at the time of shipment and installation, (1) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and ships it to the frame manufacturer 191F, which is the manufacturer of the front frame 5F. (2) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the main control semiconductor chip 16aF and ships it to the game board manufacturer 192F, which is the manufacturer of the game board 26F. The payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and the main control semiconductor chip 16aF are not limited to the case where they are manufactured by the same semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F, and may be manufactured by different semiconductor chip manufacturers 190F.

  (3-1) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the history management center 800AF of the payout control security chip ID of the manufactured payout control semiconductor chip 17aF, and inputs the payout control security chip ID into the payout side table. Update the payout table. Similarly, (3-2) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the main control security chip ID of the manufactured main control semiconductor chip 16aF, and the main control side security chip ID is sent to the main control side table. To update the main control table.

  (4) The frame maker 191F incorporates the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF into the front frame 5F to manufacture the front frame 5F. Further, the frame maker 191F ships and installs the manufactured front frame 5F to the hall 193F. (5) The frame maker 191F notifies the history management center 800AF of information specifying the front frame 5F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to be stored in association with the payout control security chip ID. As information for specifying the front frame 5F, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), the front frame manufacturing number, the delivery board management number, the product code for delivery control, the carrier code, the hall code, the shipping date, and the installation Date and time are included. Further, the information specifying the front frame 5F may include a frame format name, a product code, and a manufacturer code.

  (6) The game board maker 192F incorporates the main control semiconductor chip 16aF into the game board 26F to manufacture the game board 26F. Further, the game board maker 192F ships the manufactured game board 26F to the hall 193F and installs the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in combination. (7) The game board maker 192F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of information specifying the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. To do. As information for specifying the game board 26F, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the model name of the gaming machine, product code, manufacturer code, game board production number, main control board management number, product code for main control , Carrier code, hall code, shipping date, and installation date and time.

  (8) The hall 193F operates the P stand 2F formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. (9) The key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and pays out so as to store a pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The side table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF includes the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F, the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the semiconductor chip maker 190F, the frame maker 191F, and the game board maker 192F. Is matched.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the status of the front frame 5F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-1) and (5) shown in FIG. 103A) included in the payout table is updated. (Status) is “Shipment”, and the management state of the front frame 5F in which the information of the paired main control security chip ID (information (9) shown in FIG. 103A) included in the payout side table is updated ( (Status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the front frame 5F may be stored in the payout side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Similarly, the machine history management center 800AF uses the game board 26F in which information such as the shipping date included in the main control side table (information (3-2) and (7) shown in FIG. 103B) is updated. The game board 26F in which the management state (status) is “shipped” and the information on the security chip ID for payout control of the pair included in the main control side table (information (9) shown in FIG. 103B) is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the game board 26F may be stored in the main control side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Next, at the time of storage, (10) When the hole 193F is replaced with a new front frame 5F and game board 26F, the installed front frame 5F and game board 26F are removed and stored in the warehouse. (11) The warehouse operator 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the front frame 5F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the warehouse trader 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the game board 26F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 103, the storage information of the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F includes a gaming machine manufacturer, an installation source hall, a removal date, a storage date, and a storage location.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed from the hall 193F, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that non-operating information has been transmitted to the key management server 800F from the removed front frame 5F and game board 26F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the warehouse operator 194F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the storage date (information (11) shown in FIG. 103) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined as “Storage”. When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed, it is not always necessary to remove the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and removed. In this case, the machine history management center 800AF updates only the information (11) (see FIG. 103) of either the payout side table or the main control side table.

  Next, at the time of resale, (12) the hall 193F requests the second trader 195F to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored by the warehouse trader 194F. The used trader 195F resells the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F to another hall and installs them in the hall. (13) The used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information on the resold front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. In addition, the used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information of the resold game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to store it in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 103, the resale information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a removal date, an installation date, and a sales company name.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are resold, they are installed in different halls, and the P frame 2F is operated by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. Further, the key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and stores the pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF collates the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the second-hand trader 195F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. Further, the machine history management center 800AF manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as sales company names (information (13) shown in FIG. 103) included in the payout side table and the main control sales table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “resale”, and the front frame 5F and the game in which the information of the pair security chip ID (information (9) shown in FIG. 103) included in the payout side table and the main control side table are updated The management state (status) of the panel 26F is determined as “installation”. When reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be resold. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (13) (see FIG. 103) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not necessarily limited to reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse, but the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall. May be resold. In addition, we do not re-ship at the time of resale.

  Next, at the time of disposal, (14) the hole 193F requests the disposal company 196F to discard the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F. The discard trader 196F discards the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F by an appropriate method. (15) The discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. In addition, as shown in FIG. 103, the discard information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a collection date, and a discard date.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that the non-operation information is transmitted from the discarded front frame 5F and the game board 26F to the key management server 800F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the discarder 196F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the discard date (information (15) shown in FIG. 103) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “Discard”. When discarding the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to discard the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and discarded. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (15) (see FIG. 103) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F are not necessarily limited to the case where the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse are discarded. 26F may be discarded.

<Abnormality judgment of machine history management center>
If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of comparing the gaming machine installation information and the non-operating information with the updated information as described above, the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 104 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F by the machine history management center 800AF. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the machine history management center 800AF determines the management state (status) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on information included in the payout side table and the main control side table (SF211). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF includes the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the disposal date (information (15) shown in FIG. 103) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “discard”.

  Next, the history management center 800AF checks whether or not the transition from the previously determined management state to the currently determined management state is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212). As shown in FIG. 105A, the transition prohibition table indicates a management state in which transition is prohibited from the management state determined last time. Specifically, when the frame maker 191F manufactures and ships the front frame 5F, the front frame 5F is not discarded or resold. Therefore, in the transition prohibition table, the management state changes from “shipment” to “discard”. Transition to “resale” is prohibited. In addition, since the front frame 5F once installed, stored and resold is not shipped from the frame maker 191F, in the transition prohibition table, the management status is “installed”, “storage” and “resale” to “shipment”. ”Is prohibited. Further, since the discarded front frame 5F is not shipped, installed, stored, and resold, the management status is changed from “discarded” to “shipped”, “installed”, “stored”, and “resolded” in the transition prohibition table. ”Is prohibited. In the above-described transition prohibition table, the front frame 5F has been described as an example, but the same applies to the game board 26F.

  Next, when the change to the management state determined this time is not included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: N), the machine history management center 800AF, based on the information from the key management server 800F, the front frame 5F and the game board The operating state of 26F is determined (SF213). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF determines that the gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F, and determines that the machine is operating, and when the non-operation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F (gaming machine installation information). Is not transmitted), it is determined as a non-operating state.

  Next, the machine history management center 800AF checks whether or not the management state determined this time in SF211 and the operation state determined in SF213 are included in the update abnormality table (SF214). As shown in the update abnormality table, FIG. 105 (b), the operation state prohibited in the management state determined this time in SF211 is shown. Specifically, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed, they are in an operating state if they are within business hours, but are normally inactive if they are out of business hours. When the status is “Installation”, it is determined as abnormal if “Operates outside business hours”. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are not installed, the operation status is always inactive. Therefore, in the update abnormality table, the management status is “shipment”, “storage”, “resale”, and “discard”. When it becomes “operation”, it is determined as abnormal.

  Next, when the determined operating state is included in the update abnormality table (SF214: Y), the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality (SF215). The means for notifying the abnormality in SF 215 may be any means such as displaying the abnormality on the display device of the history management center 800AF or outputting an alarm sound from the audio output device. The history management center 800AF also reports an abnormality (SF215) when the transition to the management state determined this time is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: Y).

  The machine history management center 800AF ends the process when the determined operating state is not included in the update abnormality table (SF214: N).

  As described above, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment uses the payout side table that stores the history information of the front frame 5F in association with the payout control security chip ID and the history information of the game board 26F for main control. The main control side table stored in association with the security chip ID is included in the mass storage device 8005F, and the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on the information stored in the payout side table and the main control side table by the CPU 8001F Judge abnormalities. Therefore, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment can manage the history by associating the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that may be distributed separately with each security chip ID.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F in the P stand 2F will be described in more detail. First, in the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 79, communication between the main control board 16F provided on the game board 26F and the payout control board 17F provided on the front frame 5F is performed by the main control provided on the main control board 16F. This is performed between the portion 161F and the payout control portion 171F provided on the front frame 5F. FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between main control unit 161F, payout control unit 171F, and communication control IC.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F illustrated in FIG. 106 will be described below as being configured with one chip, but a similar function may be configured with a plurality of chips. The main control unit 161F includes a main control circuit 161aF, a communication control circuit 161bF, and a main control storage unit 161cF. The main control circuit 161aF performs various processes in the main control unit 161F (for example, a process of counting winning balls based on a signal from the winning sensor 162F or detecting fraud based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163F). Is a circuit for executing a control program for The communication control circuit 161bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The main control storage unit 161cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of a nonvolatile memory. . Note that since the main control storage unit 161cF includes FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171F includes a payout control circuit 171aF, a communication control circuit 171bF, and a payout control storage unit 171cF. The payout control circuit 171aF controls the various processing (the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F by the payout control unit 171F, or from the game ball to the holding ball to the CU3F based on the signal from the counting button 28F. A circuit for executing a control program for performing a process of requesting conversion). The communication control circuit 171bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and cryptographic communication between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. The payout control storage unit 171cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, data, and the like to be executed by the payout control unit 171F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM that is a nonvolatile memory. Since the payout control storage unit 171cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF will be described in detail. FIG. 107 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 161bF for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. First, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F in the front frame 5F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F and receive information of the payout control unit 171F by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171F in the encryption communication control unit 600F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161bF can set a timeout time for communication response and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161aF, and encryption communication for performing encryption communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 600F is provided.

  Examples of the registers included in the communication control circuit 161bF include an authentication status register 611F, an authentication interrupt setting register 612F, a transmission data buffer 613F, a transmission data number register 614F, an information transmission clear register 615F, a main control game information register 616F, and a payout control game. An information register 617F, a recovery communication completion register 618F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 611F indicates whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161F has been authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 612F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 613F is a buffer for writing game information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the game information is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Written. Also, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613F with a non-volatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and is written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is eliminated. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the transmission data buffer 613F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 613F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161F payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613F. The information transmission clear register 615F is a register for writing a request to clear data in the transmission data buffer 613F.

  The main control game information register 616F is a register into which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F and transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control game information register 617F is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F.

  The recovery communication completion register 618F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 619F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 600F communicating with the payout control unit 171F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171bF is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The communication control circuit 171bF performs communication control on a portion of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. A configuration part for performing cryptographic communication with the circuit 171b1F and the communication control IC 325aF will be described below as a communication control circuit 171b2F.

  First, FIG. 108 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1F for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. First, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the main control unit 161F of the game board 26F and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F and receive the information of the main control unit 161F by setting the communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161F and the communication control IC 325aF in the encryption communication control unit 700F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171b1F can set a communication response time-out time and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF, and encryption communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 700F is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1F include, for example, an authentication status register 711F, an authentication interrupt setting register 712F, a data reception register 713F, a reception data number register 714F, an information reception clear register 715F, a payout control game information register 716F, and a main control game. An information register 717F, a recovery request / completion register 718F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 711F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 712F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The data reception register 713F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and the buffer is a FIFO (First In, First Out) game. Information is written. In addition, by configuring the data reception register 713F with a nonvolatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the data reception register 713F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the data reception register 713F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the data reception register 713F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713F. The information reception clear register 715F is a register in which a request for clearing data in the data reception register 713F is written.

  The payout control game information register 716F is a register into which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F and transmitted to the main control unit 161F. The main control game information register 717F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 717F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  The recovery request / completion register 718F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not the recovery communication is completed is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 719F is information requesting to clear data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the main control unit 161F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1F includes a communication timeout time setting register 719aF, a communication interval time setting register 719bF, and a main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF.

  After the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F expires, the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF transfers the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F to the data reception register 713F. This register sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713F can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired (for example, from 5 seconds to 15 seconds). About seconds). As a result, for example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between the nails of the game area 27F) when authentication is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the floating ball has won a prize. It is possible to securely store and protect the information. Even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage with a long ball residence time, it is assumed that the effective period can be set long so that the information that the floating ball has won can be reliably stored.

  Originally, information cannot be written in the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F from the viewpoint of security after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. However, in the data reception register 713F, for example, it is necessary to write information indicating that the floating ball has won after authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1F sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF, and this setting is performed in the encryption communication control unit 700F, whereby the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Information can be written to the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F as long as it is within the valid period even after the authentication between and is terminated. It should be noted that the set value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF can be read after this setting is made by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  FIG. 109 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a communication control circuit 171b2F for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. As shown in FIG. 109, the communication control circuit 171b2F performs, for example, an authentication status register 721F, an authentication interrupt setting register 722F, a transmission data buffer 723aF, a data reception register 723bF, and a transmission data number register 724F in order to perform cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. , Received data number register 725F, recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F, recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F, recovery request / completion register 728F, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729aF, and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729bF and the like.

  The authentication status register 721F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 722F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 723aF is a buffer for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the business message is written to the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is included. The data reception register 723bF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which a business message transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F is written. Is written.

  By configuring the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF with non-volatile memory, communication disconnection occurs between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF, and the buffer and register that have not been transmitted due to communication failure are stored in the buffer and register. The written business message is retained even after returning. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program to generate a business message written in the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF becomes unnecessary, and the payout control unit It is possible to reduce the processing load of 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Note that since the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured by a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723aF. The reception data number register 725F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723bF.

  The recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F is a register in which the number of addition spheres is written when an addition sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power-off recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is a register in which the number of subtraction spheres is written when a subtraction sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after the power-off recovery. Note that the recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and whether or not the recovery communication is completed are written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 729F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the communication control IC 325aF, and that the data has been deleted ( This is a register in which information indicating "clear completion" is written.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the main control storage unit 161cF and the payout control memory when returning from a communication disabled state such as a power failure. The recovery process which transmits the predetermined information memorize | stored in the part 171cF is performed. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F perform a recovery completion confirmation process for resuming the generation of predetermined information by executing the user program on the condition that the recovery process ends. Specifically, the recovery completion confirmation process will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 110 is a flowchart for explaining the recovery completion confirmation process.

  First, when the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are turned on in order to recover from an incommunicable state such as a power interruption, the main control circuit 161aF and the payout control circuit 171aF start processing of an authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication results are written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, respectively. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F confirm whether or not the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF291.

  When the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: YES), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F recover in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F. It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating completion is written (step SF292). If the flag indicating the completion of recovery is not written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF292.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F start the processing of the user program when the recovery completion flag is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: YES). (Step SF293). As means for starting the processing of the user program, for example, a means for transmitting a signal for starting the processing of the user program to start the processing of the user program and a stopping means for stopping the processing of the user program are provided. There are means for starting the processing of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be restored by the recovery processing is determined. Is prevented from being written, the processing of the user program can be resumed appropriately.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

  FIG. 111 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named power-on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This power-on notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F that power is turned on and communication is started. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “power-on reception” to the main control unit 161F. This power-on reception response is a response that the main control unit 161F receives a power-on notification and starts communication.

  Next, a command having a game state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This gaming state notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F of the gaming state. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “game state response” to the main control unit 161F. This gaming state response is a response that a gaming state notification has been received with respect to the main control unit 161F.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F by processing executed by the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, with reference to FIG. 112, a sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence shown in FIG. 112 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has been normally completed.

  The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is performed by a polling method using the main control unit 161F as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. Note that communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171F sets “communication line disconnection” and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161F cannot be received even after 1 second has elapsed since the response was transmitted.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171F transmits a response command to the main control unit 161F only when normal data is received. If the main control unit 161F does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, it retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The serial numbers used for transmission and reception are stored in the storage unit for both the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and are used for command normality check, power-off recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when power is turned on, communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is performed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and an authentication new sequence is started. . As described above, the authentication sequence is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F that the chip IDs of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are authenticated and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated. . Furthermore, the process which produces | generates the encryption key and decryption key which are used for the encryption communication of the main control part 161F and the payout control part 171F by the said authentication sequence is performed. The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F after the process is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with a serial number “n”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n” without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161F transmits a game state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number “n + 1”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161F counts up the serial number to “n + 2” and transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F. Then, the payout control unit 171F sets “n + 2” without counting up the serial number, and returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F.

  In the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the interval from the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n” to the command transmission of the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1”, the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1” The interval from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n + 2” is 200 ms each.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a process when the status information request is unreached due to power failure / communication line disconnection will be described. In FIG. 113, in particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the payout control unit 171F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the gaming state notification is not reached (from the main control unit 161F). FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing when a post-recovery communication partner matches with a payout control unit 171F).

  Referring to FIG. 113, before the power interruption occurs during the game, main controller 161F transmits a gaming state notification including serial number = n to payout controller 171F. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F transmits a game state reception including the serial number = n to the main control unit 161F.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the payout control unit 171F during the game, when a game state notification including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F, the payout control unit 171F The game state notification cannot be received because of the state. Thereafter, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171F is not transmitted, the main control unit 161F performs control to stop communication assuming that the power supply is cut off after one second.

  Thereafter, when an authentication sequence is started between the power-on and main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F includes a power source including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous last transmission serial number) = n + 1. The insertion notification is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Since the game state reception serial number transmitted to the main control unit 161F before the power interruption occurred is “n”, the payout control unit 171F has a payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171F = n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171F does not match the main control sequence number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161F. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171F performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171F based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161F. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171F transmits power-on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161F.

  The main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F performs processing with the contents after the recovery process, and transmits a game state reception including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F transmits the game state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F.

  The above-described recovery process is performed because the serial numbers do not match, but information (for example, the number of game information, prize ball information, etc.) included in the recovery game information is the main control unit 161F and payout control. The recovery processing may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171F.

<Unauthorized gaming machine connection detection>
Next, a mechanism for detecting unauthorized gaming machines detected by the CU3F will be described. The card unit that can be connected to the P unit 2F is not limited to a card unit that is used for commercial purposes (corresponding to the CU3F described above, hereinafter also simply referred to as CU3F or commercial CU). It may be a game board development jig for developing a board, a development card unit (development CU) used for the development of the P stand 2F, or the like.

  However, it is conceivable to illegally play a game on the P unit 2F by using a card unit that can be connected to the P unit 2F other than the commercial CU. For example, a large number of game balls are lent out to a P board 2F connected to a game board development jig or development CU other than a commercial CU and separated from the game board development jig or development CU, and then the P board 2F. It is conceivable to play a game illegally by connecting a commercial CU.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation of the commercial CU is detected by detecting whether the P stand 2F connected to the commercial CU has been connected to a game board development jig or development CU other than the commercial CU in the past. Stop. Specifically, a mechanism for detecting whether or not a game board development jig other than a commercial CU or a development CU has been connected in the past will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when the P stand 2F connected to the game board development jig is connected to a commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the game board development jig 3EF shown in FIG. 114 includes a CU control unit 323F and a communication control IC 325aF that are the same as a commercial CU, except for having an SC 325EbF for developing P units. In addition, an identification ID indicating that it is a game board development jig is embedded in SC325EbF for P-unit development. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC board ID, and is stored in the SC325EbF as a part of the SC board ID.

  When the P board 2F is connected to the game board development jig 3EF as shown in FIG. 114, when the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the game board development jig 3EF to the P board 2F as a gaming machine message notification, The identification ID is transmitted from the development SC325EbF to the P platform 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P platform 2F is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC board ID of SC325EbF is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up in another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  The SC board ID is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF as described above, but is not notified to the user program 171pF executed by the payout control circuit 171aF. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot read the SC board ID from the payout control circuit 171aF, and the SC board ID cannot be illegally copied, so that the security is high. The SC board ID (including the identification ID) stored in the register of the payout control circuit 171aF can be erased by clearing the RAM of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing when the unit is replaced from the game board development jig 3EF to the CU3F will be described. When the P stand 2F connected to the game board development jig 3EF is connected to the CU 3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU 3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. With this gaming machine message notification, the SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the P stand 2F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC board ID to the P stand 2F is not limited to the processing of the authentication sequence. For example, after the unit is replaced with the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is turned on, the player inserts the card. The timing at which the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F as a gaming machine telegram notification may be used. In other words, any timing may be used as long as it can prevent the player from illegally using the number of game balls given by the game board development jig 3EF. In FIG. 114, in order to distinguish the identification ID from the SC 325EbF for developing the P unit and the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the identification ID from the SC 325EbF for developing the P unit is illustrated. The identification ID is not shown.

  Upon receiving the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not the P platform 2F is a connecting device other than the commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. You may just judge. If the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF. Is notified only that the game board development jig 3EF, and Bit 6 (connection of game board development jig) in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response is set to “1”.

  Based on the information of Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected P stand 2F, the CU 3F is connected to the game board development jig 3EF. Is detected. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads information on Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the card unit connected in the past was the game board development jig 3EF. When the SC 325bF detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, CU3F can prevent performing an illegal game, without taking in information in game board development jig 3EF connected in the past into CU control part 323F. Further, when the CU 3F detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the CU 3F may notify by sound or light, or may notify the detection result to the upper server.

  In FIG. 114, the identification ID is written in the user program 171pF in order to easily express that the information of Bit 6 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 is written in the user program 171pF. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F in order to easily express the state information response including the information of Bit 6 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. However, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the flag (in the fraud detection state 3) Instead of writing to the user program 171 pF as Bit 6 (game board development jig connection) = “1”), the information of the identification ID itself of the game board development jig 3EF is written to the user program 171 pF as shown in FIG. It may be complicated. Further, it may be determined whether or not the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF is based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF. Also, the information transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F is not a flag (bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3 (game board development jig connection) = “1”), but as shown in FIG. 114, the game board development jig Information on the 3EF identification ID itself may be transmitted.

  Further, the P platform 2F stores the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) without determining whether or not it is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. The identification ID may be transmitted to the SC 325bF via the user program 171pF. That is, it may be determined whether the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF or not by the P325 2F instead of the SC board 325bF and detecting the game board development jig connection.

  In addition, when replacing the unit from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF, the information of Bit6 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 is sent from the connected P stand 2F as described in FIG. The response of the status information response including it is transmitted. However, another game board development jig 3EF whose unit has been replaced has the shipped manufacturer code of the game machine development manufacturer code set in SC325EbF for P unit development, so that Bit6 = "6" It may be configured not to detect that the card unit connected in the past was the game board development jig 3EF while ignoring the information of 1 ″. In other words, if the card unit determines that the unit has been changed from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF based on the shipping manufacturer code set in the SC, it detects an error in connection with the game board development jig. do not do. As a result, in the development process in which the connection between the game board development jig 3EF and the P stand 2F is repeated, processing for detecting an error in connection with the game board development jig is not performed, so that development and maintenance work is facilitated.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when the P stand 2F connected to the development CU is connected to the commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the development CU3DF shown in FIG. 115 includes the same CU control unit 323F and communication control IC 325aF as the commercial CU, except that the development CU3DF has a development SC325DbF. In addition, an identification ID indicating that it is a development CU is embedded in the development SC325DbF. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC board ID, and is stored in the SC325DbF as a part of the SC board ID.

  When the P unit 2F is connected to the development CU3DF as shown in FIG. 115, when the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the development CU3DF to the P unit 2F as a gaming machine message notification, the identification ID is received from the development SC325DbF. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P platform 2F is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC board ID of SC325DbF is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up in another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing when the unit is replaced from the development CU3DF to the CU3F will be described. When the P platform 2F connected to the development CU3DF is connected to the CU3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. With this gaming machine message notification, the SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the P stand 2F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC board ID to the P stand 2F is not limited to the processing of the authentication sequence. For example, after the unit is replaced with the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is turned on, the player inserts the card. The timing at which the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F as a gaming machine telegram notification may be used. In other words, any timing may be used as long as it can prevent the player from illegally using the number of game balls given by the development CU3DF. In FIG. 115, in order to distinguish the identification ID from the development SC325DbF and the identification ID from the commercial SC325bF, the identification ID from the development SC325DbF is illustrated, and the identification ID from the commercial SC325bF is illustrated. Not shown.

  Upon receiving the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the P base 2F determines whether or not the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU3DF. . The P platform 2F determines whether or not the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is a connection device other than the commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF. Just be fine. When the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF is for development. Only the fact that it is a CU3DF is notified, and Bit 5 (development CU connection) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response is set to “1”.

  In CU3F, based on the information of Bit5 of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected P stand 2F, the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads the information of Bit5 in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF. When the SC 325bF detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. As a result, the CU3F can prevent an unauthorized game from being performed without taking the information in the development CU3DF connected in the past into the CU control unit 323F. Further, when the CU 3F detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF, the CU 3F may notify by sound or light, or may notify the detection result to the upper server.

  In FIG. 115, the identification ID is written in the user program 171 pF in order to easily understand that the information of Bit 5 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 is written in the user program 171 pF. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F in order to express in an easy-to-understand manner the state information response response including the information of Bit 5 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. However, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF, the flag included in the response to the status information response (Bit5 (development of fraud detection state 3) For example, instead of writing to the user program 171pF as “CU connection for CU” = “1”), the information of the identification ID of the development CU3DF itself may be written to the user program 171pF as shown in FIG. Further, based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF, it may be determined whether or not it is the development CU3DF identification ID. Also, the information transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F is not a flag (Bit5 (development CU connection) = “1” in the fraud detection state 3), but the identification ID itself of the development CU 3DF as shown in FIG. May be transmitted.

  Furthermore, the P stand 2F does not determine whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU3DF or not. A configuration in which the ID is simply transmitted to the SC 325bF via the user program 171pF may be employed. In other words, it may be determined whether the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF or not by the P unit 2F, not by the SC 325bF, and detecting the development CU connection.

  Also, when a unit is exchanged from one development CU3DF to another development CU3DF, a response of a state information response including information of Bit5 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the connected P 2F as described in FIG. Will be sent. However, in another development CU3DF whose unit has been replaced, since the shipping manufacturer code of the game device development manufacturer code is set in the development SC325DbF, the transmitted information of Bit5 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 transmitted. May be configured not to detect that the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF. In other words, if the card unit determines that the unit has been replaced from the development CU3DF to another development CU3DF based on the shipping manufacturer code set in the SC, the card unit does not detect the development CU connection error. As a result, in the development process in which the connection between the development CU 3DF and the P stand 2F is repeated, a process for detecting an error in the development CU connection is not performed, so that the development and maintenance work is facilitated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether or not the P stand 2F connected to the CU3F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or development CU3DF other than the CU3F in the past, and the CU control unit Since the communication with the H.323F is stopped and the operation of the CU3F is stopped, it is possible to prevent an illegal game by connecting to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF other than the CU3F in the past. For example, before connecting the P stand 2F to the commercial CU3F, connect it to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF and lend a large number of game balls, and use the game balls lent after connecting to the commercial CU3F. And fraud in playing games can be prevented.

  Next, a case where a gaming machine simulator other than the P stand 2F is connected to a commercial CU3F will be described. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when a gaming machine simulator is connected to a commercial CU3F. Here, the gaming machine simulator is a device for connecting, for example, to inspect whether the commercial CU3F operates normally, and can virtually output signals and information necessary for the inspection to the commercial CU3F. it can. Therefore, in order to prevent unauthorized gaming information from being transmitted by intentionally connecting a gaming machine simulator, a commercial CU3F determines whether it is connected to a gaming machine simulator or connected to the P stand 2F. It is necessary to detect.

  First, the gaming machine simulator 2AF shown in FIG. 116 has a payout control unit 171AF as with the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171AF includes a payout control circuit 171AaF and a user program 171ApF executed by the payout control circuit 171AaF. In the user program 171 ApF, an identification ID indicating that it is a gaming machine simulator 2AF is embedded.

  As shown in FIG. 116, when the gaming machine simulator 2AF is connected to a commercial CU3F, communication between a gaming machine message notification command and a gaming machine message response response is performed between the CU3F and the gaming machine simulator 2AF. For example, the CU3F transmits a state information request command for notifying the gaming machine simulator 2AF of the state of the CU3F. When the gaming machine simulator 2AF receives a status information request command from the CU 3F, the gaming machine simulator 2AF transmits a response of a status information response to notify the CU 3F of game information, a gaming machine state, and the like.

  Information for notifying the CU 3F that it is connected to the gaming machine simulator 2AF is included in the response of the status information response transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the gaming machine simulator 2AF sets Bit 7 (gaming machine simulator connection) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response = “1” based on the identification ID embedded in the user program 171ApF.

  In CU3F, the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator based on the information of Bit7 in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected gaming machine simulator 2AF. Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads Bit7 information in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator. When the SC 325bF detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, CU3F can prevent performing an illegal game, without taking in the information of connected gaming machine simulator 2AF into CU control part 323F. Further, when the CU3F detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the CU3F may notify the user by sound or light, or notify the host server of the detection result.

  Note that the identification ID is given from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to express the state information response including the information of Bit 7 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F in an easily understandable manner. It is shown as transmitted to CU3F.

  Of course, the information transmitted from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F is not a flag (bit 7 in the fraud detection state 3 (gaming machine simulator connection) = “1”), but identifies the gaming machine simulator 2AF as shown in FIG. Information on the ID itself may be transmitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether the gaming machine connected to the CU3F is the commercial P stand 2F or the gaming machine simulator 2AF, and the communication with the CU control unit 323F is stopped and the CU3F Since the operation is stopped, it is possible to prevent illegal gaming by intentionally connecting the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F. For example, the gaming machine simulator 2AF can count a large number of game balls with respect to the CU 3F, and the waiting ball counted after connecting to the P stand 2F can be rented as a game ball to prevent fraud. .

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to S units in the same manner. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 117, S platform (slot machine) 2SF is provided such that front door 2bSF is openable and closable with respect to main body frame 2aSF with the left side edge as a swing center. Although not shown in FIG. 117, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2SF in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2SF, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2SF, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2SF is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF.

  A touch panel type display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510F is a display corresponding to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) similar to the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510F is connected to the CU display control unit 350F in the same manner as the display unit 54F of FIG. 79, and display control is performed on the CU side. The indicator 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, but is provided at a lower panel portion (position below the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, a 7-segment display 50SF is provided in a lower portion of the display 510F. The 7-segment display 50SF is a display corresponding to the P 7-segment display 50F, and displays various types of information (such as the number of times the front door 2bSF is opened) of the same type as the 7-segment display 50F.

  In addition, the front door 2bSF has a single BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) A MAXBET switch 6SF that is operated when the game is started, a start switch 7SF that is operated when the game starts, and stop switches 8LF, 8CF, and 8RF that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on S units 2SF, first, similarly to P units, after securing game points using adjacent CUs, the number of bets is set using the game points. The game points are obtained by withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, the points, or the stored medals (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use game points, one-sheet BET switch 5SF or MAXBET switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510F is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7SF is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, all the reels 2LF, 2CF and 2RF are stopped, so that one game is finished, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is assigned to each reel 2LF, 2CF, When the display is stopped as a result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a game point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510F is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 117, the S stand 2SF is provided with a counting button 28SF for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 79). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display 510F in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted, and the state where the game points are decreased while the points are increased is displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3F as a status information response via the P base 2F or the S base 2SF. .

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be determined not to win is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the S stand 2SF when a start operation is detected. Equivalent to the main controller 161F of the base). The main control unit of the S base 2SF is mounted on a main control board corresponding to the main control board 16F mounted on the P base 2F. The main control unit determines the presence / absence of a winning combination by, for example, drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base transmits a signal corresponding to the type of winning to the payout control unit (corresponding to the payout control unit 171F in FIG. 79). The payout control unit gives the player a number of game points corresponding to the signal (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2SF is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aSF by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S stand 2SF is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aSF in a state of being attached to a board mounting board for connecting wiring.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and their transmission / reception modes. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 118 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 81 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Now, further explanation is omitted.

  The information to be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F includes a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes for the game balls, as described above for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the current gaming state. A pending storage number signal that can specify the latest pending storage number may be included. Note that the information output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F is not configured to be output to the outside from the information output circuit as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, but is output from the main control unit 161F via the payout control unit 171F. You may make it do.

  As described above, since the game control microcomputer provided on the main control board 16F performs data processing such as addition / subtraction processing, the information on the number of reserved memories is recognized as the latest information. Therefore, a reserved memory number signal that can specify the latest reserved memory number in the current gaming state can be output from the game control microcomputer to the outside via the information output circuit or the payout control microcomputer.

  In addition to the above-described information, the game control microcomputer on the main control board 16F includes a launch stop signal, a radio wave sensor detection signal, a magnet in addition to the information described above. Various information may be transmitted by various signals such as a sensor detection signal, an illegal winning detection signal, and a game state information setting completion signal, and the various information may be managed on the payout control microcomputer side.

  Here, the firing stop signal is a firing stop switch when the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact in the hitting operation handle 25F (a switch for forcibly stopping the firing when operated). Is operated, the hitting operation handle 25F is not rotated more than a certain rotation angle, or the card unit (CU) 3F and the pachinko machine (P stand) 2F are not electrically connected. This is output when the game control microcomputer determines that a predetermined firing stop condition is satisfied.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is transmitted to the main control board 16F by the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 163F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves). A sensor error is determined and output based on the determination.

  The magnet sensor detection signal indicates that the magnet sensor (magnet switch) for detecting abnormal magnetism (illegal magnetism) is connected to the main control board 16F (game control microcomputer), and a magnet is used to Based on an illegal game using a magnet such as changing the trajectory, a magnetism sensor signal is input to the main control board 16F based on an illegal game using a magnet, and a magnet sensor error is determined in the game control microcomputer. Is output based on.

  The unauthorized winning detection signal is sent to the winning winning opening of the winning sensor 162F in a state in which the counting winning switch is connected to the main control board 16F and the winning switch is closed. When an illegal winning error is determined by detecting a winning ball in the big winning mouth in the gaming control microcomputer based on the detection signal of the winning sensor for detecting the winning ball of the game, an output is made based on the determination. .

  The game state information setting completion signal is output when the setting of various game information (game state information) transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is completed when the power of the pachinko machine (P units) 2F is turned on. The Such a game state information setting completion signal is used as a trigger signal for starting communication between the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko machine side), for example.

  In addition to the information as described above, the microcomputer for game control on the main control board 16F from the payout control microcomputer on the payout control board 17F includes the following glass frame / main body frame opening signal, the number of winnings. Various information such as abnormal signal, illegal addition detection signal, radio wave sensor detection signal, proximity sensor abnormal signal, night open detection signal, counting notification request signal, card removal waiting signal, and power saving transition request signal The various information may be managed on the game control microcomputer side.

  The glass frame / main body frame opening signal is generated when the detection signal from the glass door opening detection switch 12F or the front frame opening detection switch 13F is input to the dispensing control board 17F. When the opening of the front frame 5F is determined, the output is made based on the determination.

  The winning number abnormality signal confirms whether the number of winnings per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number in the payout control microcomputer with respect to the number of winnings by the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. Whether or not the winning number is abnormal is determined based on the determination, and when it is determined that the winning number is abnormal, an output is made based on the determination.

  The illegal addition detection signal indicates that an illegal addition error is determined by the payout control microcomputer when the payout control board 17F receives a coin addition request from the CU3F in a state other than when the card is inserted into the CU3F. Based on the output.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is a radio wave sensor error in the payout control microcomputer because the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 173F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves) is input to the payout control board 17F. Is determined and output based on the determination.

  Proximity sensor abnormal signal is generated by winning sensor 162F, ball raising switch (upper) 41aF, foul ball detection switch 330F, out ball detection switch 701F, and launch ball detection switch due to a change in capacitance due to the passage of the ball. It is composed of proximity switches to be detected. For such proximity switches, the dispensing control microcomputer determines whether or not there is an abnormality based on the number of balls detected, and when the abnormality is determined, the determination Is output based on. For example, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected. On the other hand, when the actually fired ball is collected and detected by the shot ball detecting switch, It is determined that the proximity sensor is abnormal because wrinkles occur in the number of fire balls and recovery balls (out balls).

  The night open detection signal is output when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened as follows. At night when the pachinko machine 2F is turned off, the glass door 6F is detected based on the detection signals output from the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F by the above-described counting counter operated by the backup power supply. The number of times the front frame 5F has been opened is counted. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 2F is turned on, either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened in the payout control microcomputer by the count value of each opening number output from the count counter to the payout control board 17F. Is determined. It is also possible to detect the nighttime opening of only one of the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F and output the nighttime opening detection signal.

  The count notification request signal is output to make a request to notify the count value when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that a count request has been made in response to the operation of the count button. Such a count notification request signal is used, for example, to execute audio output and numerical display related to counting by the main board.

  The card removal waiting signal is output to notify the card return ready state OFF and card removal waiting ON information when the payout control microcomputer determines that the card can be removed by the CU 3F.

  When the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact (for example, when it has not detected for a predetermined period) in the payout control microcomputer, the power saving transition request signal is “0”. When it is determined that a predetermined power saving control transition condition is satisfied, for example, when a card is not inserted into the CU3F or when a variable display is stopped, for example, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight Is output as an operation request signal for shifting to a power saving state in which predetermined power saving control is performed such as a decrease in light emission and stop of light emission of various lamps.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, an example is shown in which the information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won. Such an external output of the winning information signal may be applied to the pachinko machine (P units) 2F.

  In addition, it is possible to transmit various signals such as the reserved memory number signal, the emission stop signal, and the radio wave sensor detection signal described as signals to be transmitted from the game control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the payout control microcomputer. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above may be applied. In addition, the transmission of various signals such as the glass frame / main body frame opening signal and the winning number abnormality signal described as signals to be transmitted from the payout control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the game control microcomputer has been described above. You may apply in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the above gaming system, for example, there are P units of reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board for controlling the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, in the S platform, the various detection switches 41aF, 701F, 33F, the launch control board 31F, and the launch motor 18F of the game frame shown in FIG. 79 are unnecessary.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in the present embodiment, such a problem can be prevented by providing a function for displaying a dollar box. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510F.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, or point payout operation) from a prepaid card balance, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510F and display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. In other words, if there is an operation of the single BET switch 5SF, the bet number setting value is incremented by 1, and the credit is decremented by 1. If the MAXBET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510F and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (2) In this embodiment, a game point is added by consuming card frequency. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (3) In this embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (4) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU3F, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described above. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (5) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (6) When an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is desirable to display a message prompting the counting on the P-unit or the CU side display. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (7) The counting time from the start of the counting operation to the completion of the counting display is based on the game points when the game points are less than the first reference value and when the game points exceed the first reference value. The increasing rate of the counting time may be reduced. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect of counting display as if counting real spheres, and it is possible to prevent an excessive amount of time until counting is completed due to an increase in game points. Further, when the game points exceed a certain reference value, all the counting times may be the same. Alternatively, the same counting time may be adopted regardless of the number of game points without providing a reference value.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the glass door 6F opening detection and the front frame 5F opening detection are detected by the separate glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F. Alternatively, both may be detected by a common detection switch.

  (9) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function for turning on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and 2 within 1 second from the operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (10) When the counting operation button is operated for less than a predetermined time (short-time operation), for example, the first number of balls is counted, and when operated for a predetermined time or longer (long-time operation), the first operation is performed according to the operation time. It is desirable to control so that the number of balls larger than the number of balls of 1 is counted. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls are counted in the short-time operation, while a predetermined number exceeding 100 balls, for example, 200 balls or 400 balls, is counted in the long-time operation. Also, the number of game points to be counted may be controlled to be different depending on the long press time of the counting operation button. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls start to be counted by long-pressing for 1 second, and if the long-pressing continues for 5 seconds as it is, all the remaining balls are counted. Alternatively, it may be controlled such that a predetermined number is counted by one operation and all remaining balls are counted by the fifth operation.

  (11) (A) The fact that game points equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of points” are not stored does not count game points even if a counting operation is performed, and a notification to that effect is given. Also, (B) when the game points are counted until the stored game points reach the “predetermined number of points”, no more counting is possible, and control is performed so that a notification to that effect is given. Is desirable. The same number may be adopted as the predetermined number of points in these two cases (A) and (B), that is, the reference value may be different.

  (12) When the counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, it is desirable to control the counting operation to be invalidated when the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. However, even if the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number. In some cases, the counting operation may be invalidated when the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected does not satisfy the reference value.

  Further, in order to invalidate the counting operation during the game, it is desirable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the ball firing operation is detected. Instead of this, or in addition to this, whether the number of in-game balls (floating ball floating in the game area 27F) is 0 (not in game) or not (in game) It may be determined whether or not. In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine to invalidate the counting operation during the game is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF are stopped.

  (13) When the number of game balls is greater than a predetermined number regardless of whether or not a big hit is being made, a display prompting a counting operation may be performed.

  In addition, if the counting operation is not detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display for prompting the counting operation, the game ball may be forcibly stopped, and the firing is not forcibly stopped. It may be.

  (14) Referring to FIG. 81, the P platform is provided with a counting ball number counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (15) The display for prompting the counting operation may be a display of “Please play the game after the game balls remain, so please return it” or display the counting button 28F on the screen. The display may be blinking.

  (16) When the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (3,000 balls or more), control is performed so that “control for performing a display prompting a counting operation on a display device” is executed as “predetermined notification control”. Is desirable. Here, “prompt counting operation” means, for example, a message that displays “Counting operation because the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” or a message that simply displays “Counting operation is required.” It may be. Further, the “predetermined notification control” may be a control for outputting a notification sound for prompting a counting operation from a speaker. Further, the “notification” may not be “notification for prompting the counting operation” but simply notify that “the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” (not to prompt for the counting operation). .

  Further, when the game point is equal to or greater than a predetermined first reference value (3000 balls or more), “predetermined notification control” is performed, and thereafter, the game point is set to a second reference value greater than the first reference value. It may be controlled so that the game is disabled when the game point is reached, and the game is permitted (no firing prohibited) until the game point reaches the second reference value from the first reference value. In the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine, the inoperable state can be realized by controlling the start lever to operate so that the reel does not start rotating or the betting number setting is invalidated.

  (17) When a game using game points is being performed (while the ball is being fired), control is performed so that the counting operation is not validated unless there are more than a predetermined number of game points (for example, 250 points). It is desirable to do. Here, the predetermined number of points is not limited to 250 points, and may be any number as long as it is 1 point or more. However, for example, when an excessively small number of points such as one point is set, a malfunction occurs when the timing of firing and the timing of counting occur almost simultaneously. Alternatively, if a counting operation is detected when the number of points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 points or less) and the counting operation is detected, 5 points are left for launching and the remaining points are counted. You may control to.

  In addition, when it is detected that a player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated because there are no more points left than the predetermined number of points has been stopped, it is invalidated first. The counting operation may be activated to automatically start the counting operation. That is, in this case, the player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated only needs to stop the firing operation, and does not need to perform the counting operation again.

  (18) In order to change the number of game points to be converted by one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (19) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short pressing operation of the counting button is made different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (20) When counting game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from the speaker. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (21) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on a counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (22) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station. The relationship may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (23) In FIG. 81 or FIG. 118, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU It may not be stored on the side. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (24) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54F may be similarly performed on the display 312F.

  (25) In the CU, the stored number of game balls is updated based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) and the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, for hall use). An error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801F).

  (26) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (held ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (27) When the counting operation is executed, the points may be counted up at an accelerated rate when a predetermined time has elapsed since the counting up of the points was started. Alternatively, a speed-up button for accelerating the count display may be displayed on the touch panel display on the CU side or the gaming machine side, and the operation may be detected to display the acceleration count display. By performing the acceleration counting display of the points in this way, the waiting time of the player when counting a large number of gaming points can be shortened.

  (28) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the touch sensor detects that the player is holding the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (29) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (30) The sequence control shown in FIG. 83 to FIG. 92 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3F, P stand 2F, S stand 2SF, etc., particularly for processing related to security. For example, the present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as a CU3F, a P stand 2F, a jet counter, and a POS terminal.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID. However, instead of or in addition to this, the identity of the player is determined based on the biomass of the player's fingerprint or retina. May be performed.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, a so-called enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F and S stand 2SF) is shown, but it is not limited thereto, and a game medium (such as a pachinko ball) is provided from the upper part of the island. It may be a general gaming machine that is supplied to a gaming machine and from which a gaming medium is paid out by winning. Specifically, the game is performed by hitting the balls stored in the ball storage tray into the game area, and when winning, the balls are paid out to the ball storage tray, and are paid out to the ball storage tray at the end of the game. Pachinko machines that can exchange prizes using balls may also be used. Also, the coins stored in the coin tray are inserted into the coin slot, the number of bets is input and set, and the reel is rotated and stopped by operating the start lever. When a display result winning that is sometimes displayed has occurred, a slit machine may be used in which coins are paid out to a coin tray, and paid out to the coin tray at the end of the game so that prizes can be exchanged using the coin. That is, a gaming machine that can be played using game media (pachinko balls, coins) and that pays out game media to the player in accordance with the result of the game may be used.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are calculated. It may be controlled so that the number of game balls and game points are added after being withdrawn.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is deducted within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding ball, savings ball) and the corresponding game points are added, In the above example, game points having the same value are added, but instead, for example, control may be performed so that game points corresponding to consumption tax are added to the value actually deducted.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, authentication is performed using various authentication keys, but authentication may be performed using, for example, an authentication ID instead of the various authentication keys.

  (36) You may comprise the above-mentioned indicator 54F and 510F with a display with a touch panel. Further, the information transmitted / received between the P platform and the CU is not limited to that described in the above-described embodiment, and it is a game that determines what information is output from the P platform to the CU. You may enable it to perform input setting by touch operation with the touch panel of the display units 54F and 510F.

  Also, in the S stand 2SF, the information output from the S stand 2SF is converted and transmitted to Hallcon in the same manner as the P stand 2F described above. As information to be converted, for example, a big bonus prize or a regular bonus prize is given. And winning information such as various small role winnings, information indicating that the replay time is in progress, the number of additions and subtractions in FIG. 118, the number of game starts, and the like. Further, the information to be converted may be the number of coins to be paid out when coins are paid out with winning.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that “the gaming device (CU) is a predetermined player with the gaming points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion processing for all gaming points is completed (game points = 0)”. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322F)) ”.

  Here, the enabling means is, for example, “means for confirming game point 0 on the P platform side and transmitting card discharge operation permission ON to CU” or “game when receiving card return notification from CU”. It is determined whether or not the number of balls is 0, and in the case of 0, a means for validating card return by returning a card return response to the CU ", and further," game by performing counting operation etc. " It is a concept that includes “means for establishing the condition that the number of balls = 0 and consequently the card return is valid”.

(38) When the payout control unit 171F receives a value (= 63) in which the round flag is raised, the abnormality control process is executed by adopting one or more of those listed in the following a to c You may control as follows.
a Display unit (for example, a 7-segment display 50F and a variable display device that variably displays identification information (design)) by the payout control unit 171F or the main control unit 161F that receives abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F Is displayed.
b CU3F that has received the abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F performs abnormality notification such as an error number.
c An abnormality notification such as an error number is performed in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from the CU3F.

  (39) In the present embodiment, information specifying the front frame 5F, storage information, resale information, disposal information, and the like are included as history information of the front frame 5F stored in association with the payout control security chip ID in the payout side table. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as history information of the front frame 5F. Similarly, in the present embodiment, information specifying the game board 26F, storage information, resale information, discard information, and the like are stored as history information of the game board 26F stored in the main control side table in association with the main control security chip ID. Examples included are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as the history information of the game board 26F.

  (40) In this embodiment, after a manufacturer, a warehouse company, or the like completes operations such as shipping, installation, and storage, necessary information (for example, shown in FIG. 103, for example, from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF). The delivery side table and the main control side table are updated by inputting the shipping date, installation date and time, removal date, sales company name, and disposal date). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a manufacturer or a warehouse company fills in application documents with necessary information and sends the information to the history management center 800AF. The payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting necessary information from a terminal or the like. Note that a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF is also a terminal connected directly to the machine history management center 800AF (for example, an internal terminal in the machine history management center 800AF) via a communication line. It may be a terminal (for example, a terminal of a warehouse company or a second-hand company connected via the Internet).

  (41) In this embodiment, an example in which the payout side table and the main control side table are stored in one large capacity storage device 8005F has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the payout side table and the main control side table are stored separately in a plurality of large capacity storage devices, the large capacity storage device that stores the payout side table and the main control side table are stored. It may be divided into a mass storage device. Further, the payout side table and the main control side table stored in the large-capacity storage device can erase the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for each security chip ID. Even if it is associated with a pair of security chip IDs, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F can be deleted separately for each security chip ID. Thereby, even if it is the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (the period used is long compared with the front frame 5F) from which the period used is different, it can delete separately, respectively, and it can manage appropriately, respectively. it can.

  (42) In the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which a manufacturer other than the hall, a warehouse company, etc. update the payout side table and the main control side table by inputting necessary information to the machine history management center 800AF. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting information necessary for the hall itself to the machine history management center 800AF.

  (43) In this embodiment, when a second-hand trader resells the front frame 5F and the game board 26F to another hall and installs them, the resale information is stored as history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when moving to another hole in the same group as the hole in which the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed (for example, a hole with the same corporate code), the front frame 5F and the game board The movement information may be stored in the history information as a simple movement of 26F (management state (status) from “installation” to “installation”). That is, even if the installation of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F moves between holes of the same corporate code, it is not determined as abnormal. In addition, if the movement of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is permitted between halls of the same corporate code and within the same prefecture, and if it moves to other prefectures between halls of the same corporate code, the same processing as resale is performed. May be.

  (44) In this embodiment, the history management center 800AF is set as follows, for example. In the machine history management center 800AF, a user registered in the system and authenticated by clear authentication is logged into the system. Authentication at login is as follows: (a) The specified user ID exists in the system. (B) The specified user is within the account expiration date. (C) The specified user is not account-locked. (D) The entered password matches the password of the specified user ID. (E) If the current password is not within the validity period, the user is logged in, but only the user's own password change and logout can be used, and a message is displayed indicating that the password needs to be changed. If the password is changed, log out to confirm the use of the new password.

  When the authentication is successful, the history management center 800AF clears the number of login failures and the continuous login error date / time of the user. On the other hand, the history management center 800AF records the number of login failures when the authentication fails or when the user actually exists. Each time the number of login failures reaches [the maximum number of login attempts] (when it becomes an integer multiple), the date and time when the account is locked is set.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the password expiration date when (a) a new user is registered, (b) when the password is cleared, and (c) when the user changes the password. The updated / set password is valid from that point until the [Password Validity Period] elapses.

  If the authentication fails [the maximum number of login attempts] in the same session, the history management center 800AF transitions to the login NG screen instead of the login screen and does not attempt to log in.

  The history management center 800AF warns that at the time of login, the password may expire if the password of the user expires within the [password expiration warning period]. The warning is displayed on the login completion screen, for example, but if there is no message to be displayed on the login completion screen, the login completion screen is not displayed and the screen transits to the HOME menu.

  The machine history management center 800AF determines that (a) the number of failed login attempts by a user exceeds the [number of failed user login failures] (permanent account lock state), or (b) ] Has not passed (temporary account lock state), lock account.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the account expiration date when (a) a new user is registered or (b) the validity period is updated from the user information screen. The account can be used during the period from the account activation start date to the account activation end date.

  The history management center 800AF sets, for example, 20 as the maximum number of accounts that can be generated at one time at the time of initial introduction. Here, [the maximum number of login attempts] is the number of times the account is locked for a certain period of time due to consecutive failed login attempts, and is set to, for example, 5 times at the initial introduction. [User Invalidation Login Failure Count] is the number of times the account is permanently locked due to consecutive login attempt failures, and is 100, for example, at the time of initial introduction. [Login attempt refusal time] is a period in which the account is locked for a certain period of time due to failed login attempts, and is 30 minutes at the time of initial introduction. [Password Validity Period] is a password validity period set when the password is changed, and is 90 days at the time of initial introduction. [Password Expiration Warning Period] is a period in which an account password is about to expire, and is 14 days at the time of initial introduction.

  The machine history management center 800AF sets the minimum number of characters of a password to 8 characters, for example, at the time of initial introduction, and sets the number of generations (including the current) to prevent re-use of passwords to, for example, 3 generations at the time of initial introduction. The history management center 800AF is registered on the condition that the operator information of the corresponding user is registered in order to register the user information. The business operator information includes attribute information such as the business type and address of each business operator involved in the work of the history management center 800AF.

  The machine history management center 800AF cannot basically cancel the management state (status) of the gaming machine after input, and if an error occurs due to an erroneous operation or the like, a comment is entered in the “total machine history remarks column”. Make it clear so that others can understand. However, since there is a possibility of erroneous insertion, it is possible to cancel only the status entered from the game machine status update screen. When revocation is possible, control is performed by authority so that only a limited number of people can perform revocation. Further, when searching the machine history in order to change the management state (status) of the gaming machine, the machine history management center 800AF searches only for the latest management state (status) of the gaming machine.

The machine history management center 800AF manages the types of data and the retention periods for each type as follows, for example.
(1) Account-related data (for example, business operator information, account information, etc.): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, and physical deletion is not performed.
(2) Master information such as gaming machine model (for example, gaming machine model master): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, and physical deletion is not performed.
(3) Information that is the basis of machine history management (for example, gaming machine chip shipment information, gaming machine shipment information, etc.): Basically, changes can be made until management is started, but thereafter editing is impossible. , Manage permanently.
(4) Machine history information (for example, history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F): Since it is basically input of fact information, changes after input are not allowed and are managed permanently.
(5) Information notified from the card unit key management center (for example, fraud detection, etc.): Information detected by the system, and is not allowed to be changed and managed permanently.
(6) Input journals to the system (for example, Web input log, online input log, system linkage input file, etc.): 14 days are stored for each type of input and each node.
(7) Output journal from system (for example, Web output log, online output log, system transmission file, etc.): 7 days are kept for each type of output and for each node.
(8) Record of business communication of concentration / distribution (for example, distribution schedule, etc.): Information is retained for about 7 days.
(9) System temporary file (for example, CSV upload file): Deleted after application behavior. However, it is deleted when it is confirmed that the cleaning batch is unnecessary in consideration of abnormal termination.
(10) Model information that has not been updated for a long period of time (for example, model information that has not been updated for a long period of time): Holds two generations.

  In the history management center 800AF, information on the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which the relationship between the management state (status) before the update and the management state (status) after the update becomes abnormal with respect to the abnormality in the management state (status). Can be extracted, or only the information can be output to a file. Therefore, based on the information output in the file, it is possible to notify the user of management status (status) update omission and to update the management status (status) correctly. It should be noted that a user whose management status (status) is not updated may not only be contacted but also interviewed to confirm the correct management status (status) and take a response. In addition, the machine history management center 800AF performs notification such as contacting all of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that are currently in an abnormal management state (status). In addition, the latest information (at the time of file output) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that have become abnormal can be downloaded from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF.

  In the history management center 800AF, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for which the management status (status) has not been updated for a long period of time becomes a management status (status) other than “discard” or “other”. It is possible to extract only the information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, or to output only the information to a file. For abnormalities in which the management state (status) has not been updated for a long time, information at the time of processing is extracted by batch processing and downloaded from a terminal connected to the history management center 800AF. In addition, a threshold for the maximum number of files (at the time of initial construction: 100,000 records) is set for one file to be downloaded, and when the threshold is exceeded, output is performed to another file. Furthermore, when downloading a file, the results of processing on the same day are collected and output as a compressed file.

  (45) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the removal information is input to the history management center 800AF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and used movement information, discard information, trade-in information, and the like are stored in the history management center 800AF. When the information is input, the removal information may be automatically registered in the history management center 800AF. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to manage the history of the gaming machine by assuming that it has been removed from the hall, and to reduce the burden of inputting the removal information from the hall to the history management system.

  (46) In the present embodiment, the configuration is shown in which the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line after the gaming machine manufacturer ships the gaming machine to the hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which shipping information is automatically registered in the machine history management center 800AF when the gaming machine manufacturer inputs information for shipping gaming machines to the hall. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the shipping state history from being forgotten without being registered.

  (47) In the present embodiment, when a gaming machine including the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F constituting the P board 2F is installed in the hall, the enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P machine 2F) shipped by the gaming machine maker, The history management center 800AF stores the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified from the P table 2F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in each, and is notified from the stored information and the P table 2F. Checking with game machine installation information. If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of the collation, for example, an error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error has occurred in the hall management computer or the hall server 801F. The error notification signal is transmitted, and the abnormality is notified. However, the machine history management center 800AF is not limited to the configuration for notifying the abnormality as a result of the collation, but the P frame 2F or the front frame 5F constituting the P table 2F and the game board 26F determined to be abnormal. It may be configured to prohibit gaming. The machine history management center 800AF may be configured to temporarily allow a game on the P table 2F for a certain period of time even if it is determined to be abnormal, so as not to hinder the hall business activities.

  (48) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the security related information is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be stored in a register (for example, the data reception register 723bF) in the communication control circuit 171b. As a result, the security-related information is stored as encrypted in the communication control circuit 171b, and the security is further improved.

  (49) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the P base itself determines that the P base 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU 3DF in the past, The configuration in which the flag indicating the determination result is transmitted to the commercial CU3F and detected by the SC325bF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The P base itself determines that the P base 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU 3DF in the past, and the P base itself detects and notifies. Also in the configuration, the configuration may be such that it is detected by the SC 325bF of the CU3F based on the identification ID, based on the identification ID, that the P board 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF in the past.

  It should be thought that embodiment disclosed this time is an illustration and restrictive at no points. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 9 production | presentation display device, 13 1st start winning opening, 14 2nd starting winning opening, 20 special variable winning ball apparatus, 31 game control Board (main board), 56 CPU, 80 effect control board, 100 effect control microcomputer, 101 effect control CPU, 109 VDP, 502 clock circuit, 506 reset / interrupt controller, 506a IAT circuit, 506b watchdog timer (WDT) ), 507 Free-run counter circuit, 508a 8-bit random number circuit, 508b 16-bit random number circuit, 525a, 525b random number generation circuit, 537 update monitoring circuit, 560 game control microcomputer, 920 power supply monitoring circuit, 2F pachinko machine, 2SF slot Machine, 3 F card unit, 16F main control board, 17F payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F display, 309F card insertion / discharge port, 319F replay button, 320F IR light receiving unit, 321F lending button, 322F card return button, 161F main control unit, 325F display control unit, 171F payout control unit, 50F, 50SF 7-segment display, 323F CU control unit, 12F glass door open detection switch, 13F front frame open detection switch.

Claims (1)

After the game medium passes through the start area, the identification information is variably displayed based on the fact that a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and it is advantageous for the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the identification information. A game board capable of controlling and playing a specific game state,
A plurality of types of winning areas including the starting area;
A game control microcomputer for executing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game after executing an initial setting process when power supply to the game board is started;
Power supply monitoring means for outputting a voltage drop signal based on a voltage drop of a power supply of a predetermined potential;
Resetting means for measuring a predetermined monitoring time and resetting the gaming control microcomputer when it is measured that the monitoring time has elapsed;
A signal output means for outputting a signal that can identify a winning area where the game medium has won and a winning number;
The game control microcomputer is:
Storage means for storing data used in the game control process and capable of holding the stored content for a predetermined period even when power supply to the game board is stopped;
Based on the input of the voltage drop signal, the power supply stop process is performed to save the storage contents of the storage unit on the condition that a specific value is set in a predetermined area in the storage unit Power supply stop processing execution means to perform,
Reset setting means for setting to enable or disable the operation of the reset means;
Restoration processing for restoring the control state to the state before the power supply is stopped based on the stored contents of the storage means on the condition that a predetermined value is set in the predetermined area when the power supply is started Recovery processing means for executing
And a prohibiting means for prohibiting execution of the power supply stop process when the specific value is not set in the predetermined area,
The game board, wherein the predetermined value is set in the predetermined area when the power supply stop process is executed.

Images